JP2020022907A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of outputting voice with consideration of an interest of a player.SOLUTION: When a double ready-to-win is displayed, and when a voice lamp control device 114 receives a probability variation pattern ready-to-win display command, then, voice data for outputting probability variation ready-to-win voice corresponding to a ready-to-win pattern which established a probability variation ready-to-win, is set in a ready-to-win voice area 223d5. Then, when the probability variation ready-to-win voice is output (S2343:No) by using the voice data set in the ready-to-win voice area 223d5, even if a normal pattern ready-to-win display command is received from a display control device 114, the display command is ignored (S2345). Thereby, on the voice lamp control device 114, by the normal pattern ready-to-win display command, the normal ready-to-win voice is not output. Therefore, when the double ready-to-win is displayed on a third pattern display device 81, only the probability variation ready-to-win voice can be listened by a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as fluctuation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game.

JP 2008-272159 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machines, sound output is not always performed on the effect image displayed on the display device in consideration of the interest of the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can perform audio output in consideration of the interest of a player.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a main control means for performing a main control of a game, a sub control means for performing a control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a sub control means for the main control means. Display means for performing a variable effect with dynamic display of identification information under the control of, and audio output means for outputting a sound, wherein the identification information is a predetermined display in the variable effect performed by the display means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when the game is stopped and displayed in the mode, and the first mode, the second mode, and the variable mode are performed as the variable mode performed by the display unit. , A third production mode simultaneously showing the first production mode and the second production mode, wherein the variable production is performed by the display unit as the audio output by the audio output unit. Place where it is performed in 1 production mode And a second sound output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode on the display means, and the sub-control means includes: Display control means for controlling the display on the display means, and voice control means for controlling the output of sound by the sound output means, wherein the display control means controls the display content on the display means to the sound control means. When the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display device, the notifying device firstly displays the second effect mode as the display content on the display device. Notifying to the voice control means, and then notifying the first effect mode to the voice control means, wherein the voice control means displays on the display means notified by the notification means An output control means for selecting a sound to be output and starting output based on the second effect form, when the second effect mode is notified from the notifying means as display content on the display means, And a non-accepting unit for setting all the notifications from the notifying unit to a non-accepting state for a predetermined period after that.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub control means for performing the control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the control of the identification information by the control of the sub control means. Display means for performing a fluctuating effect with an objective display, and audio output means for outputting a sound, wherein the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the fluctuating effect performed on the display means A predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode are provided as the effect modes of the variable effect performed by the display means. And a third effect mode simultaneously showing the second effect mode, wherein the variable effect is performed in the first effect mode on the display means as the sound output by the sound output means. The first audio output when A second sound output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode on the display means, and the sub-control means controls display on the display means. Display control means, and audio control means for controlling the output of audio in the audio output means, the display control means comprises a notifying means for notifying the audio control means of the display content on the display means, the The notifying unit, when performing the variable effect on the display unit in the third effect mode, first notifies the voice control unit of the second effect mode as display content on the display unit, The first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means outputs a sound to be output based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means. Output control means for selecting and starting output, and when the second effect mode is notified as display content on the display means from the notifying means, the notification is received for a predetermined period after receiving the notification. Since there is provided a non-reception unit for setting all notifications from the unit to a non-reception state, there is an effect that sound output can be performed in consideration of the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen and an effective line setting of the third symbol display device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device when double reach is established. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a RAM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in a ROM in the main control device. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters of the main control apparatus, the various holding ball storage areas, and the various holding ball execution areas. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a variation pattern table for a jackpot. (D) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation (normal) variation pattern table, and (e) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation (probable variation) variation pattern table. It is the figure which showed typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a player to “left hit”, and (b) is a hitting ball instructing a “right hit” to the player. It is the schematic diagram which showed the direction instruction | indication screen typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display data table for change typically. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main command determination processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the right-handed left-handed determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the right-handed left-handed determination process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the passing of a ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a right-handed shot when the gaming state is during a probability change or during working hours; FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an example in which two balls pass through the first through gate 67 during 10 seconds, and FIG. 9B illustrates that at least three balls pass through the first through gate 67 during 10 seconds. It is a figure showing an example in the case of having done. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sound reproduction setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice reproduction setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating reproduction | regeneration of the reach audio | voice when double reach is displayed on a 3rd symbol display device, (b) is a single reach of a probability change reach on a 3rd symbol display device. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing reproduction of reach voice when displayed. It is a flow chart which showed audio reproduction setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sound reproduction setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device. It is an explanatory view for explaining reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically various data stored in RAM in the sound lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sound reproduction setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity, and is accompanied by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start-start prize) described later. Various productions such as fluctuation productions and reach productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a “sea stage” with a motif in the shallow sea, a “palace stage” with a marine palace motif, and a “deep sea stage” with a deep sea motif are prepared as stages. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

  Further, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), windmills, rails 61 and 62, General winning opening 63, first opening 64, second opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80 The periphery is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is provided in the through hole, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged in the upper right portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Have been. Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of being changed, during working hours, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing, or not, by changing the lighting state, and the stop symbol is definitely changed. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or the off symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. Each of the seven-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different from each other, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when there is a ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicate a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of a second symbol described later increases and a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which a ball easily enters 640. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  Although details will be described later, during probable change or during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes a state that it is easy to ball. Therefore, during probable changes or during working hours, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. At least one of the number of times to perform the change may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time are not determined. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal case.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs a variable display of the three symbols, and a third symbol display device 81 triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. There is provided a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle and lower Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen and the effective line setting of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when so-called double reach is established.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol over substantially the entire area of the screen. In addition, in the lower center part of the main display area Dm, a reserve which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. A hold display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

  The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm includes ten types of main symbols including ten types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”, It is composed of one type of sub-design (in the present embodiment, a shell design) formed smaller than the main design. The main symbols and the sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  When the pachinko machine 10 detects the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a jackpot lottery is performed, and the third symbol is displayed together with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37a). On the display device 81, a variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol is executed. The fluctuation effect is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol are scrolled (horizontal scroll) from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) with a periodicity for each symbol row. As shown in FIG. 4, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbol are arranged so as to appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a rising line L4, and a rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in each game, when a variable effect of scrolling horizontally is stopped, if a combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, Is displayed as a jackpot video.

  That is, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variable display (variable effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the variable effect ends. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the game. When the state shifts to the high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the big hit (in the case of the probability change big win), a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to “probably variable symbols”) corresponding to the odd numbers are prepared. On the other hand, when shifting to the low-probability state after the end of the jackpot (normal jackpot), a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to “ordinary symbols”) corresponding to the even numbers are prepared.

  The stop of the variable effect is performed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. If it has been performed, a screen notifying the fact is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "reach established", and a voice for notifying the reach is provided on the audio output device 226 provided on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5). ) Is output. Here, “reach” indicates a state in which when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 may cause a big hit.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is arranged such that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol rows appear in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in the lower symbol row Z3. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left and middle symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1, Z3 are displayed. -The arrangement of the third symbol in the right three rows may be reversed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4 (b), the main symbol (Zugon), the sub symbol (shell), and the main symbol (shark) of "6" are arranged in order from the left in the upper symbol column Z1. In the lower symbol row Z1, a main symbol (shark) of "6", a sub symbol (shell), and a main symbol (Dugong) of "7" are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. , The arrangement of the third symbols is reversed.

  In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (shark) of “6”, the main symbol (6) is displayed on the activated line L4. Sharks), that is, the normal symbols, which are the main symbols corresponding to the even symbols, are arranged, so that a normal jackpot is achieved, and after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the low probability state and the time saving state is achieved. On the other hand, if the middle symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (Dugong) of “7”, it is the main symbol (Dugong) of “7” on the activated line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probability variation symbols are aligned, a probability variation jackpot is established, and after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the high probability state. That is, the state shown in FIG. 4B may be a big hit on the two activated lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the normal jackpot or the probable big hit may be obtained. There is a possible state, that is, a “double reach” state in which two reach are established.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, double reach can be achieved in the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, a simple single reach (reach in which the possibility of a big hit on only one pay line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed) is achieved. In comparison, it is possible to make the player expect the possibility of a jackpot to be higher. In addition, it is possible to make the player have more complicated feelings, such as a probability change jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether the probability change jackpot does not become a normal jackpot and becomes a loss. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

  The reserved display area Db is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. It is. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), the The number of times of ball entry is reserved up to four times for entering the first entrance port 64, and up to four times for entering the second entrance port 640. The total value of the number of retained balls at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and also indicated by the retained display area Db.

  In the reserved display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (a symbol in FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b)) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the reserved ball number symbol is retained according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when eight reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Is 8 balls. In addition, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the reserved display area Db, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Similarly, when entering the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 are not limited to the same number, but are different. It may be set to the number of times. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be set to four, and the maximum number of retained balls for entering the second entrance 640 may be set to two.

  Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Db, the number of reserved balls is displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into one or a plurality of areas is represented by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a different form (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Each time the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols) for a predetermined time. The variable display for alternately lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  Note that the second entrance 640 can be increased during the probability change or during the working hours by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability changing or the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the ball is easy to enter, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or during the time saving, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to be able to pass a part of a ball flowing down the left side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and allows a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board to pass therethrough. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp. 84 is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the balls through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). May be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of award balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are calculated. The same configuration, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different numbers, For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 is set to 5. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change and during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal state.

  Here, although the details will be described later, the probability of a big hit in the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is that when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the ball enters the first entrance 64. It is set higher than you would. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the first entry opening 64 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is stopped so that the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is provided below the second ball entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the first symbol is set so as to become a jackpot stop symbol. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 650a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and a forward side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. A large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing is provided. The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the special winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area. Opened for a predetermined time, when the balls enter the specific winning openings 65a, 650a while the specific winning openings 65a, 650a are being opened, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a, 650a is set. A game state that is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result in the second symbol display device 83. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating various data stored in the ROM 202.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the RAM 203 stores a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 Reserved ball counter 203e, general figure reserved ball number counter 203f, general figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203g, general figure reserved ball number counter 203h, general figure reserved ball storage area 203i, general figure reserved ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag At least 203k.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c202c, and a departure variation pattern table 202d202d.

  Further, in the main control device 110, the main features of the pachinko machine 10 such as the above described jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 are described. In order to execute the processing, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters.

  Here, referring to FIGS. 7 and 8, various counters provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in ROM 202, and various holding spheres stored in RAM 203 The areas 203a, 203b, 203i and various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing an updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the timing of updating the counter for each counter. Perform an update.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It returns to the structure. When the first random number counter C1 has been updated once (when the update is periodically performed from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is updated. Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in a range from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, as will be described in detail later, at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The special figure 1 is stored in any of the first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second entrance 640, the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is stored in one of the first to fourth areas.

  The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by a big hit random number table 202a (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. The first random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure second reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot (the jackpot random number value) set in the jackpot random number table 202a, the MPU 201 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types, one for a low-probability state (a state where the probability is not being changed) and one for a high-probability state (a state where the probability is larger than the low-probability state). And the number of jackpot random numbers contained therein is set differently. By changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (small jackpot random value) that is a big hit in the low probability state is three, and the big jackpot random value “7,307,582” is “low” in the “game state”. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “probability state”.

  On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers are “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448”. , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 "are associated with the" high probability state "of the" game state ", It is stored in the random number table 202a.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value associated with the “low-probability state” and the jackpot random number value associated with the “high-probability state” In order to avoid this, each jackpot random value is set. If there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally assigning a jackpot may increase. As in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number of the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state), the value of the random number of the jackpot is predicted. It is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit, and is added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 holding ball in the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the special figure 1 reservation first to fourth areas provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 2 holding ball in the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the special figure 2 reservation first to fourth areas provided in the area 203b.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (1) is not a random number with a big hit, that is, if it is a random number out of the range, the variation pattern in the variation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter, “stop type”) ) Is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203b or one reserved area in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation effect is used. The fluctuation pattern and the stop type are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the change pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the big hit type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum round number shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “4R variable jackpot” where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after four rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, the association between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a jackpot, and the second entry The association between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the mouth 640 is a jackpot is separately defined.

  In the example of FIG. 8B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is a jackpot and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2, “ The jackpot type table for the "first entrance" is defined as follows. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability change big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the prize to the first entrance 64, the big hit type becomes a 15R probability changing big hit with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ), A 15R regular jackpot, and a 1/2 (= 50/100) probability, a 4R variable jackpot.

  On the other hand, as a correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning at the second ball entry port 640 is a big jackpot, the “second ball entry port” is used. The jackpot type table is defined as follows. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variable jackpot, the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, The value “50 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change big hit. That is, when a big hit is made in accordance with the prize to the second entrance 640, the big hit type becomes 15R certain variable big hit with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ), A 15R normal jackpot is obtained, and a 1/4 (= 25/100) probability is a 4R variable jackpot.

  As described above, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is that when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a ball enters the first entrance 64. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is provided with the motorized accessory 640a, and the ease with which the ball can enter the second entrance 640 depends on the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, in normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops: a "reach out of front and rear", which stops after the reach occurs, and a "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol. Direction) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the special figure 1 reservation first to fourth areas provided in 203a. At the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second entrance 640, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any one of the special figure 2 reservation first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number with a big hit, a stop type is selected as a stop type at the time of miss based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area. You.

  A plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It is easy to select "completely off". In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. It is difficult to select “completely out of order”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easy to select. Therefore, in the low-probability state, the reach display with a long effect time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining a variation pattern. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 21).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Are stored in any of the reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas. Also, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second entrance 640, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time together with the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Is stored in any one of the special figure 2 reservation first to fourth areas provided in the storage area.

  The MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc., based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine design of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a jackpot variation pattern table 202c used at the time of a jackpot and a departure variation pattern table 202d used at the time of departure as the variation pattern tables. In addition, as the variation pattern table 202d1 for departure, a variation pattern table 202d1 for departure (normal) and a departure (depending on whether the game state is a low probability state during normal times except during time reduction, or during probable change). A use (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

  Here, one reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (any one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in (?) Is a random number with a big hit, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is obtained from the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

  One reserved area in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth area) ) Stored in the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, when the gaming state is in the normal low probability state except during working hours, When the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern, and the gaming state is during a time reduction or a probable variation. The stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. Variation patterns selected in the case of a jackpot include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Among these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. ) Is selected.

  Here, the various types of the no-reach are fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (a so-called bitter-stop pattern is aligned). . Various types of super-reach are fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds longer than those of the normal reach, and the first symbol (or the third symbol) after a relatively long reach (for example, a reach developed from a long reach or a normal reach). ) Are fluctuation patterns. Various types of special reach are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds and longer than that of various types of super reach. Reach that is performed for the longest time (for example, reach that develops further after super reach and the destination from normal reach is super reach is This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after a different special reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there is a large number of things that have different production contents even in each reach. There is a reach displayed suddenly, etc. In addition, a plurality of reaches with different effect contents are included, such as an effect in which a notice effect before the start of change is added and an effect in which a big hit is added by re-change.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (c), also in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, similarly to the variation pattern table 202d for departure (see FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e)), the game state is normal and the time is reduced. Alternatively, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is different between during the probable variation.

  Specifically, when the game state is normal, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 50 for various types of normal reach, 51 to 179 for various types of super reach, and 180 for various types of special reach. １９198. On the other hand, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the case where the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability variation is 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  According to the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, when the game state is normal, various types of super reach and various types of special reach having a long variation time are easily selected as the variation pattern. On the other hand, when the game state is during the time reduction or the probable change, various normal reach with a short change time are easily selected as the change pattern.

  During normal times, since the probability of a jackpot is low, various types of Super Reach and Special Reach with long fluctuation time are frequently selected as fluctuation patterns, and during the fluctuation production by various Super Reach and Special Reach It is possible to greatly increase the sense of expectation that the player will win. On the other hand, during working hours or during probable changes, the motorized accessory 640a is likely to be in an open state, and a winning start is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if many fluctuation patterns with a long fluctuation time are selected during working hours or during probable changes, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation effect, giving the player a waiting state, which may cause discomfort to the player There is. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is also unfavorably reduced. Therefore, when the game state is during a time reduction or a probable change, the normal reach of which fluctuation time is shorter than that in the normal state is configured to be easily selected, and the start of the next fluctuation display is performed early, so that the game is started. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Further, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability change, various special reach is not selected. Although details will be described later, various types of special reach are not selected in the case of being off. In other words, when the variable effect is performed by the special reach, it means that it is a 100% jackpot. Here, during the probable change, the gaming state is always a big hit from the point of view of the player, so if the fluctuating effect is performed by the special reach during the probable change, the fluctuating effect ends earlier than the joy of the big hit. Then, the player is strongly dissatisfied with the desire to shift to the special game state (big hit state). In the present pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation effect by the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probable change, so that the player's dissatisfaction can be avoided.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the association between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same when the gaming state is during the time reduction and during the probable change. The association between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, during the working hours, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be defined so that various special reach types are selected as variation patterns. Since it is not always guaranteed that a jackpot will be won during the working hours, the fluctuation effect by the special reach is performed, so that the player can have a sense of expectation of becoming a jackpot.

  Further, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when reach is established, The number of symbols shifted to stop the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after) may be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8D, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is exclusively used for complete detachment, which is referred to when complete detachment is determined as a stop type at the time of detachment, and reach-behind-reach and forward-backward-reach. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. Is attached. One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big random number, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state except during the time reduction, the first In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is used for the deviation. (Normal) Determined from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  The complete departure only includes a short departure in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and a long departure in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short departure (10 seconds) but the reach is not established, The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0-98 for short deviation and 99-198 for long deviation. In addition, there are various types of normal reach that reach is established but the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and various super reach is longer than the normal reach and have a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The attachment is 0 to 149 for various types of normal reach and 150 to 198 for various types of super reach.

  FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (e), the deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the departure stop type, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the out-of-reach reach and the out-of-before-and-off reach and the reach other than the out-of-front and off-reach are determined. The groups are divided into groups (groups) based on the stop types, and the values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the respective divided groups.

  One reserved area (one of special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas, special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) in special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c If the stored value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of a probability change, the same holding area In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the storage area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is obtained from the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

  The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0-190 for short deviation and 191-198 for long deviation. The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is 0 to 190 for various normal reach and 191 to 198 for various super reach.

  Since the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is during a time reduction or a probable change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning at the second entrance 640. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there is a lot of misalignment during time saving or probable change, it takes time to start the next fluctuation display, giving the player a waiting state and giving the player discomfort There is. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is also unfavorably reduced. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured such that short-off is easier to select than in other cases, and by starting the next fluctuation display early, The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Further, in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2 which are referred to in the case of the variation, various special reach that can be selected as the variation pattern in the case of the big hit are not selected. As a result, in the case where the floating effect is performed by the special reach, a 100% jackpot is achieved. Also, even in the case of a jackpot, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of selection is low as 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can make the player feel as a special variable effect, and when the variable effect by the special reach is performed, a great joy can be given to the player.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of notice, etc.). Further, the selection of the type of disconnection is configured to be divided into the variable pattern for normal (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the variable pattern for positive (variable) table 202d2. In the case of (for example, three or more in the case of a maximum of four), the fluctuation display may be ended early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, A configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern table for normal or certain variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls is prepared.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIG. 8D and FIG. 8E, short deviations and long deviations are simply deviated, and when the departure is selected, the other tables are referred to. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which short-range and long-range deviations are selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is a counter used for a random lottery of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83, and for example, adds one by one in a range of 0 to 250. The loop counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the update is periodically performed from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is performed, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, It is acquired and stored in one of the first to fourth areas of the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i provided in the RAM 203.

  In the second random number counter C4, the number of random number values to be a win in the normal game state is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that a hit is made when the gaming state is normal, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a stop symbol (the second symbol). The symbol “O” is displayed as a light (2 symbols), and the electric accessory 640 a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. In addition, the number of random numbers that can be a hit when the gaming state is during working hours or during probable changes is 250, and the range is “1 to 250”. In other words, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game state is a hit when the game state is during a time reduction or a probable change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. As a symbol (a second symbol), a symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than in a normal operation.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set higher during the probable change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal operation, the symbol “O” is easily displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( (Expanded state) increases. On the other hand, during the probable change and during the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change and during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal state.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low even if the probability is large. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability that the 15R probability change jackpot is selected as the type of the jackpot selected in the case of the jackpot is the first entry port when the ball enters the second entry port 640. It is set higher than the case where the ball enters the ball 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, in normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

  By the way, in the RAM 203, a special figure 1 reserved sphere storage is made up of four reserved areas (special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 63. An area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b also has four reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas), similarly to the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. .

  Each of the reserved areas provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has a first random number counter obtained from the counter buffer when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a first hit random number counter storage area 203a1, a first hit type counter storage area 203a2, and a change pattern selection counter for storing the values of the change type counter CS1 respectively. It has a storage area 203a3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203a4. Although not shown, any of the reserved areas provided in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, like the respective reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, have a first random number counter C1, A storage area for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is provided.

  In the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection are set in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the special figure 1 The value is stored. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold second area. Store.

  If there are two reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of each counter are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first and second areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area. Store the value of. If there are three reservations in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the special figure 1 reserved first to third areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 reserved fourth area. Store the value of. Thereby, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order of the start winning prize to the first entrance 64 are stored in the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second. The area can be stored in an area, a special figure 1 reserved third area, and a special figure 1 reserved fourth area.

  On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer, the first type counter C2, the stop, The respective values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are stored. Which of the reserved areas (special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas) of the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b stores the value of each counter is determined by the reserved area stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. Based on the number, it is determined in the same manner as in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Thus, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning prize in the order in which the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 is obtained are stored in the first area of the special figure 2 and the second area of the special figure 2 The area can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 reserved third area, and the special figure 2 reserved fourth area.

  If the start winning prize to the first entrance 64 is detected when the values of the respective counters are stored in all of the special map 1 reserved first to fourth areas, the values of the respective counters at that time are detected. Is discarded without being suspended. Similarly, when the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 is detected when the values of the respective counters are stored in all of the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas, the counters of the respective counters at that time are detected. The value is discarded without being reserved. That is, in the present embodiment, in each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four starting winnings.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure reserve sphere execution area 203c. At the start timing of the variation effect, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b The values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and stop type counter CS1 are respectively stored in first hit random number counter storage area 203c1, first hit type provided in special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c. The area is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  If there is no reservation in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and there is a reservation in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a stores the special figure 1 reserved first area. The stored values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Then, the value of each counter stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c. Is determined based on the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the type of the stop symbol.

  In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type. Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b regardless of whether there is a hold in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. Is moved to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect, and the type of the stop symbol are determined. Is performed. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, the jackpot lottery is performed with the start winning at the second entrance 640 prior to the start winning at the first entrance 64, and the variable effect is performed based on the jackpot. It is configured as follows.

  The value of each counter of the special figure 1 reserved first area of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the value of each counter of the special figure 2 reserved ball first area of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is After being moved to the special figure reserved sphere execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area is changed to the vacant special figure 1 reserved first area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. FIG. 2 is shifted to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area is shifted to the empty special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area. The value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved fourth area is shifted to the empty special figure 1 reserved third area or the special figure 2 reserved third area.

  As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter retained in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the reserved by the second entrance 640 decreases by one, and the special figure 2 reserved ball One area of the storage area 203b is opened. Further, when the variable effect is started based on the values of the respective counters held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the number of reserves by the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage is performed. One area of the area 203a is opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift each data of the reserved area (second to fourth) to an area having an area number smaller by 1 irrespective of the presence or absence of data in each reserved area. Data shift may be performed only for the reserved area in which (values of various counters) are stored (reserved). For example, the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) retained in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is performed is 2, the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area. Only when the data is stored, the data in the special figure 1 reserved first area is shifted to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, and then the data in the special figure 1 reserved second area is transferred to the special figure 1 reserved second area. The shift processing may be terminated by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift processing is not performed on the reserved area in which data is not stored (reserved) (in the above example, the third to fourth areas reserved in FIG. 1), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  The RAM 203 also includes four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) in which each counter value is stored with respect to the passage of a ball in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A reserved ball storage area 203i is provided. Each holding area is a second random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer by passing the ball through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. 203i1.

  The second-period random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer is stored in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i in accordance with the passage timing of the ball in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, if there is no reservation in the general figure holding ball storage area 203i and all of the general figure holding first to fourth areas are free areas, the second figure random number counter C2 is stored in the general figure first holding area. Is stored. In the case where there is only one hold in the general figure holding ball storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general figure hold first area, the second random number is stored in the general figure hold second area. The value of the counter C4 is stored. In the case where there are two holds in the general figure holding ball storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general figure holding first and second areas, the third figure is stored in the general figure holding third area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored. In the case where there are three reservations in the general figure holding ball storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the general figure holding first to third areas, the general figure holding fourth area is stored in the general figure holding fourth area. The value of the random number counter C4 per 2 is stored.

  Thereby, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passage timing of the sphere in the order in which the passage of the sphere is detected in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, is stored in the ordinary drawing pending second. It can be stored in one area, a general-purpose reserved second area, a general-purpose reserved third area, and a general-purpose reserved fourth area. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first to fourth areas of the ordinary figure reservation, when the passage of a ball is detected in the first or second through gates 67 and 670, The value of the second random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being held.

  The RAM 203 is also provided with a general-purpose reserve ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the change display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the general figure holding ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the general figure holding first area of the general figure holding ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second per-random number counter C4 is moved to the second per-random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the ordinary figure holding sphere execution area 203j. Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter storage area 203j1 of the ordinary figure holding ball execution area 203j, a winning lottery of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed.

  Incidentally, when the value of the second random number counter C4 of the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i in the first general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i is moved to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, it is thereafter stored in the second general-purpose reserved ball storage area. The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant general-purpose reservation first area. Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the third general area is shifted to the vacant second area, and the second random number counter C4 stored in the fourth general area is saved. The value is shifted to the vacant third place area.

  As a result, when the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second random number counter C4 retained in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203i, the ordinary symbol is held for only one symbol. As a result, one area of the ordinary figure holding ball storage area 203i is opened.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when performing data shift processing between the respective reserved areas (the first to fourth areas of the reserved general-purpose drawing) in the reserved general-purpose ball storage area 203i, regardless of the presence or absence of data in the respective reserved areas. Instead, each data in the reserved area (normal drawing second to fourth areas) is shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one, but the data (values of various counters) The data may be shifted only in the reserved area in which () is stored (reserved). For example, the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) retained in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i before the data is shifted is 2, and only the general-purpose reserved first area and the general-purpose reserved second area are provided. If the data is stored, the data in the first general-purpose reserved area is shifted to the first general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j, and then the data in the second general-purpose reserved area is shifted to the first general-purpose reserved area. , The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift processing is not performed for the reserved area where the data is not stored (reserved) (in the above example, the third and fourth areas reserved for general drawing), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the RAM 203 will be continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are the first entrances detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) on the first symbol display device 37 (standby) based on the ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize). ) Are counted up to a maximum of four times. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process (S1613 in FIG. 20) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time a variable effect is executed.

  In addition, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64, and the respective counter values are stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. When stored, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by a special figure 1 reserved ball count command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. .

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 640, and the respective counter values are stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. When stored, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by a special figure 2 reserved ball count command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 pending ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. .

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command to reserve the ball in the main controller 110 for the variable effect accompanying the starting prize to the first entrance 64. It is possible to obtain the number and the value of the number of retained balls in the variable effect associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can manage the number of balls to be reserved for the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9 (c) special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special figure 2). Refer to the reserved ball number counter 223b). In addition, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the audio ramp control device 113, so that the retained ball count of the variable effect managed by the audio ramp control device 113 is reduced by noise. Even if the number of balls to be held deviates from the actual number of balls held in the fluctuation effect held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of the above, the difference can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  It should be noted that the number of retained balls of the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64 managed in the sound lamp control device 113 (special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) and the second entrance 640. The number of retained balls of the variable effect accompanying the start winning of the game (special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 and received. Thus, it is updated at the timing of setting the mode of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (ie, the timing of starting the variable effect). In other words, if the start of the variable effect is due to the start winning at the first entrance 64, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 is reduced by one, and the starting variable is If the effect is accompanied by a winning start at the second entrance 640, the number of balls reserved for the variable effect associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640 is reduced by one.

  The main control device 110 determines whether or not the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation type is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern command transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is accompanied by the start winning prize to the first entrance 64, Information indicating whether or not it is associated with the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 is included. In the sound ramp control device 113, based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command, whether the fluctuation effect to be started is due to the start winning at the first entrance 64 or the start to the second entrance 640 It is determined whether or not this is due to a prize, and based on the result of the determination, the number of balls reserved for the fluctuation effect accompanying the starting prize to the first entrance 64 and the fluctuation due to the starting prize to the second entrance 640. A process of reducing one of the number of retained balls of the effect by 1 is performed.

  In addition, every time the number of reserved balls managed therein changes, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the number of retained balls of the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64. Then, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number obtained by adding the retained ball number of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance opening 640 is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-retained-balls symbols for the number of retained balls notified by the display reserved-ball-number command in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the reserved display area Db, the number of variable displays (the number of retained balls) retained by the start winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is indicated to the player.

  The normal figure pending ball number counter 203f is configured such that the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of held balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the result. In the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S1613 in FIG. 20), zero is set as an initial value. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of 4 (S1503 to S1504, S1508 to S1509 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the ordinary figure holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one every time the fluctuation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is executed.

  The variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) can be held up to four times by the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f. Also, the second symbol holding lamps 84 (see FIG. 2) for the number of reserved balls indicated by the ordinary figure reserved ball number counter 203f are turned on. As a result, the number of balls to be held in the variable display of the second symbol is notified to the player.

  The special figure type flag 203k is used to determine whether the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in accordance with the start winning at the first entrance 64, or the second entrance. 640 is a flag indicating whether the processing is to be executed in response to a start winning prize. When the special figure type flag 203k is off, it indicates that the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed with the start winning prize to the first entrance 64, When the flag 203k is on, it indicates that the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is to be executed in accordance with the start winning a prize to the second entrance 640.

  This special figure type flag 203k is set to OFF or ON at the initial stage of setting the start of the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, and the start to the second entrance 640 is performed. If the values of the various counters acquired along with the winning are retained in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 reserved first area of the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b Is shifted to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 16).

  In addition, when the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, while the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0. If the values of the various counters which are greater than 0 and are acquired with the start winning prize to the first entrance 64 are retained in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a The values of the various counters stored in the special figure 1 hold first area are shifted to the special figure hold ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to off (see S1304, S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 16). ).

  In the MPU 201, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variable effect of the first symbol (the third symbol), a special jackpot type table (see FIG. 8B) used for determining the jackpot type is provided. One of “for the first entrance” and “for the second entrance” is set based on the diagram type flag 203k. Specifically, when the special figure type flag 203k is off, the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed along with the start winning prize to the first entrance 64. Therefore, a big hit type table for the “first ball entrance” is set. On the other hand, when the special figure type flag 203k is on, the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed with the start winning prize to the second entrance 640. , A jackpot type table for the "second entrance" is set.

  As described above, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot with a prize in the first entrance 64 is a 15R probability variable jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ), A 15R regular jackpot, and a 1/2 (= 50/100) probability, a 4R variable jackpot. In the case of a big hit with a prize to the second entrance 640, the big hit type is a 15R probability changing big hit with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). The probability is a 15R regular jackpot with a probability, and a 4R probability variable jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100). In other words, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is that when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a ball enters the first entrance 64. It is set higher than you would.

  As described above, the second entrance 640 is provided with the motorized accessory 640a, and the ease with which the ball enters the second entrance 640 changes according to the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, in normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various areas, counters, and flags illustrated in FIG. 6A, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags. And a work area (work area) in which values such as a counter and I / O are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 20). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of specific winning ports 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 through the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  Here, the details of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least an audio data storage area 222a.

  The audio data storage area 222a is an area for storing audio data that is data for reproducing audio output from the audio output device 226. The voice data storage area 222a stores a voice output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emission effect image in which a predetermined area is brightly emitted on the third symbol display device 81. , And voice data corresponding to each type of voice, such as a voice (hereinafter, referred to as a “reach voice”) that is output when a reach occurs during a fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81. I have.

  Upon receiving a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reads out audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222222, The sound output based on the sound data is output from the sound output device 226. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to output audio data that matches the display content from the audio output device 226.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the main control device 110 and the operation state of the frame button 22 by the player, and the determined display mode Is instructed to the display control device 114 by a command. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the sound data in accordance with the determined display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and outputs the sound reproduced by the sound data from the sound output device 226. Is also possible. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is received from the display control device 81, and the voice is synchronized with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command. Data is selected, and the sound reproduced by the sound data is output from the sound output device 226.

  Thereby, even if an image different from the display mode determined by the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for some reason such as noise, the display command received from the display control device 114 causes Since the display content of the three symbol display device 81 can be grasped, it is possible to output from the audio output device 226 a voice that is actually matched to the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by notifying the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a sequential display command from the display control device 114, the display timing of the image on the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 113 The output timing of the audio can be easily adjusted, and the occurrence of a sound shift can be suppressed.

  Now, in the pachinko machine 10, different voice data is prepared as the reach voice for each of the main symbols of the third symbol (ten types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”). Specifically, when a normal reach (a reach that becomes a 15R normal jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of “0” as a reach symbol, a character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of “0” (for example, , "Kasago"), the 0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0, which is voice data for reproducing the voice of "reach!", Is stored in the voice data storage area 222a. When a probability change reach (a reach that becomes a 4R probability change jackpot or a 15R probability change jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of “1” as a reach symbol, a character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of “1” (for example, The first symbol positive change reach voice data 222a1, which is voice data for reproducing the voice of "reach!" With the voice of "octopus", is stored in the voice data storage area 222a.

  Also, for each of the main symbols "2" to "9", when a normal reach or a certainty reach occurs with the main symbol as a reach symbol, the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol "reach!" , "Reach!" And "Reach!" Are stored in the voice data storage area 222a as the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2 to the ninth symbol positive change reach voice data 222a9, respectively. Have been.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a reach occurs, the reach voice is changed for each main symbol that has become the reach symbol. Moreover, the reach voice is output in the voice of the character design corresponding to the main design. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character arranged in the main symbol that has become the reach symbol has notified the reach. Therefore, the player's interest in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main symbol corresponding to the even number is the reach symbol, as described above, a 15R normal jackpot occurs when the symbols are aligned. Also, when the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is a reach symbol, a 4R probability variable hit or a 15R probability variable hit occurs when the symbols are aligned.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the reach voice output when a reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is referred to as a “probable reach voice”, and the reach voice output when the reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to the even number. As “normal reach voice” to distinguish them.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9 (b), the difference between the probability reach voice and the normal reach voice will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the probability-change reach voice and the normal reach voice.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), as for the sure-change reach voice, the reproduction of the sound section is started immediately after the reproduction is started, and a voice such as "reach!" Then, after a predetermined time (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B), the sound section ends and, at the same time, the reproduction of the probability-change reach voice ends. On the other hand, when the normal reach sound starts to be reproduced, a silent section is reproduced for a predetermined time, 20 milliseconds in this embodiment, and thereafter, for a predetermined time length (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B). ) Is reproduced in the sound section. That is, when the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started, silence is first performed for 20 milliseconds, and thereafter, a sound such as “reach!” Is uttered.

  Note that the time length of the sound section is not limited to 1500 milliseconds, but may be an arbitrary time length. In addition, the time lengths of the probable-variable reach voice and the normal reach voice may be different, and the length of the voiced section may be any length of time for each of the reach voice data 222a0 to 222a9 corresponding to each main symbol. May be set.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 4B, the pachinko machine 10 normally uses a symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 when the upper symbol column Z1 and the lower symbol column Z3 are stopped and displayed. A double reach that can be a jackpot or a probable jackpot is established. In other words, the normal reach and the positive change reach occur simultaneously.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the display control device notifies the audio lamp control device of "Successive change reach established" as display content of the third symbol display device. And a display command for notifying that "normal reach has been established", and the sound ramp control device outputs the positive change reach sound and the normal reach sound in a superimposed manner from the sound output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  Furthermore, when the double reach is established, the player has the expectation that the probability jackpot is to be established as a jackpot rather than a normal jackpot, since the jackpot probability becomes higher after the jackpot. . Therefore, when the expectation of the player is considered, when the double reach is uttered, the character of the character corresponding to the main symbol that has established the probability change reach is more than the voice of the character corresponding to the main symbol that has established the normal reach. There is also a demand that the player hear the reach voice by voice, that is, the player wants to hear the sure-change reach voice.

  Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 firstly sets the reach that establishes the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the symbol type, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted immediately together with the type of reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. Keep it. On the other hand, when receiving each display command from the display control device 113, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 immediately reads out the audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a. Then, the sound is reproduced and output from the sound output device 226. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sound ramp control device 113 first outputs a probability variation reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probability variation reach, and thereafter, Immediately, a normal reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established is output.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9 (b), as for the surely-changed reach voice, the reproduction of the voiced section is started immediately after the reproduction is started, and a voice such as "reach!" Is uttered. On the other hand, since the normal reach voice is a silent section for about 20 milliseconds even when the reproduction is started, the normal reach voice is reproduced without sound.

  When the MPU 221 starts playing the reach sound, the MPU 221 immediately confirms the number of reach sounds currently being played. If the number of reach voices currently being reproduced is two, the reproduction of the most recent reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice whose reproduction has started later is stopped. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probability change reach sound is reproduced to the end. In addition, since the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach voice is once reproduced, the reproduction of the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  When the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display command for notifying “normal reach established” together with the reach symbol is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp is controlled. The control device 113 outputs a normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach has been established, based on the display command. In this case as well, the first 20 milliseconds are silence periods, but even if a voice such as "reach!" Is output with a delay of 20 milliseconds, humans do not feel that the output was delayed. In addition, if an image that moves completely in synchronization with the sound is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if a sound such as "Reach!" The player does not feel that the game has occurred. Therefore, there is no problem even if the silent section of 20 milliseconds is initially set in the normal reach voice.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the time length of the silence section of the normal reach voice is set to 20 milliseconds. However, the time length does not make the user feel that a voice such as "Reach!" Any value may be set as long as the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 do not have a time range in which a sound shift is not felt.

  In the audio data storage area 222a, other audio data 222a10 is stored as audio data other than the reach audio data. The other audio data 222a10 includes, as described above, audio data for reproducing audio output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emitting effect for the third symbol display device 81. Audio data for reproducing audio output when an image is displayed is included.

  Next, details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a reach voice reproducing counter 223c, a reproduced voice data storage area 223d, a probable variable time reduction flag 223e, a first through gate passage flag 223f, and a second It has at least a through gate passage flag 223g, a first after-gate passage time counter 223h, a second after-through gate passage time counter 223i, a first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j, and a second through-gate passage ball number counter 223k. I have.

  The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, like the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, activates the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol It is a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110.

  The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, activates the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol It is a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and controls the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control apparatus 110. Unable to get value. Therefore, based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls retained in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, respectively. The number of reserved balls is managed by the ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 by adding the reserved ball number of the variable effect by the start winning to the first entrance 64. When the special figure 1 reserved ball count command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received in this case, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is added. The subsequent value (that is, the number of balls to be held in the fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning at the first ball entrance 64 held by the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (S2007 in FIG. 24). reference).

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main control device 110 by adding the reserved ball number of the variable effect by the start winning to the second entrance 640. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is received. (That is, the number of balls for the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 held by the main controller 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223b (see S2010 in FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, when the main controller 110 subtracts the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e in the main controller 110, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is used. Is received, and the mode of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, and the variable effect is caused by the starting prize to the first entrance 64 or to the second entrance 640. One of the values of the special figure 1 reserved sphere number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved sphere number counter 223b is decremented by 1 depending on whether or not the start prize is involved (see S2108 and S2109 in FIG. 25). It should be noted that whether the fluctuating effect accompanies the start winning prize at the first entrance 64 or the prize winning at the second entrance 640 is determined by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Is included, and a determination is made based on the information.

  As described above, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the reserved ball number indicated by the command to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure. 2 is stored or updated at the timing of storing the value in the reserved ball number counter 223b or updating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of a value obtained by adding the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after the This is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 24 and S2110 in FIG. 25).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, it displays the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol for the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is also changed to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The reach voice reproducing counter 223c is a counter that counts the reach voice during reproduction (output from the audio output device 226). In the reach voice reproducing counter 223c, 0 is set as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, when a reach display command for notifying that a reach has been established (established reach or established reach) is received from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 causes the reach corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) included in the reach display command. The sound is read from the sound data storage area 222a and reproduced, and 1 is added to the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c (see S2304 in FIG. 29).

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes "2", it means that two reach voices are being reproduced. The two reach voices are being played when double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 of the present pachinko machine 10 firstly sets the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to transmit a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach along with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and then immediately transmit a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach along with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach. I have. Further, these two reach display commands are continuously transmitted, and between the two reach display commands, other display commands (commands indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and other than the reach display commands). Command is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, upon receiving each command from the display control device 113, the MPU 221 immediately reads out audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the command from the audio data storage area 222a and reproduces the audio, Output from the audio output device 226.

  That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sound ramp control device 113 first outputs a probability change reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probability change reach, and thereafter, Immediately, a normal reach sound corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established is output. Therefore, in this case, first, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “1” at the stage where the probability-variable reach voice is output, and then the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2” at the stage where the normal reach voice is output. Become.

  Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the sound lamp control device issues a command for notifying “the probability change reach has been established” as the display content of the third symbol display device. When a command for notifying "normal reach" is received from the display control device, the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, first, it outputs reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2” and the number of reach voices being reproduced becomes two, the reach voice that has been reproduced most recently, that is, the normal reach voice that has been reproduced later, is started. Stop playback.

  As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are reproduced once, but the reproduction of the normal reach voice is immediately stopped. , Only the probable reach voice will be played to the end. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds. Therefore, even if the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started once, the reproduction of the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach, Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted in accordance with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and the sound lamp control device 113 firstly, according to the received reach display command, Playback of two reach voices is started in order. Then, when determining that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach sound whose reproduction has been started most recently (the reach sound whose reproduction has started later). As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the positive change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is changed to the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, the player can hear only the probable reach voice. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in the processing load, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  The reach voice reproducing counter 223c stops the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach voice (the normal reach voice whose reproduction is started later) when the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2”. Is initialized to “0”. The reach voice reproducing counter 223c is also initialized to “0” when another display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113.

  The reproduction audio data storage area 223d is an area for storing audio data for reproducing the audio output from the audio output device 226. The MPU 221 generates an audio signal while decoding the audio data stored in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and outputs the generated audio signal to the audio output device 226, so that the audio is output from the audio output device 226. Will be played.

  Here, the audio ramp control device 113 has four audio reproduction channels, and is configured to be able to reproduce four audio data simultaneously. The reproduction audio data storage area 223d has an area for storing audio data to be reproduced on the audio reproduction channel for each of the four audio reproduction channels. That is, a first channel area 223d1 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the first audio reproduction channel, a second channel area 223d2 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the second audio reproduction channel, A third channel area 223d3 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the third audio reproduction channel and a fourth channel area 223d4 for storing audio data to be reproduced on the fourth audio reproduction channel are provided. It is provided in the audio data storage area 223d.

  The MPU 221 reads audio data corresponding to the display content from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222 based on the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command received from the display control device 114. The read audio data is stored in one of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d.

  The MPU 221 decodes the audio data stored in the corresponding first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 for each of the first to fourth audio reproduction channels, and generates an audio signal. Then, the audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and then output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be simultaneously reproduced and output from the audio output device 226.

  The probable change time reduction flag 223e is a flag indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change or the time reduction. The probable change time saving flag 223e indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is being promiscuous or being reduced in time when it is on, and that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not being promiscuous nor being reduced in time when it is off. Indicates that

  The probable variable time saving flag 223e is set to a third value when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command from the main control device 110 (a command for confirming and displaying a stopped symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variable effect). The update is performed based on the result determined and displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see S2021 in FIG. 24).

  Specifically, when the symbol of the probability change jackpot (15R probability change jackpot or 4R probability change jackpot) is definitely displayed, the subsequent game state is in the process of changing the probability, so the probability change time reduction flag 223e is set to ON. Further, when the symbol of the normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) is fixedly displayed, the game state is during the time reduction until 100 fluctuation effects are performed, so the probable variation time reduction flag 223e is set to ON. I do. In addition, when the gaming state is during working hours, it is determined whether or not the variable effect has been performed 100 times after the normal jackpot has been performed each time the confirmed display of the missing symbol is performed. When it is determined, the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, so that the certainty variable time saving flag 223e is set to off.

  The probable change time reduction flag 223e is used for performing control to instruct a player to perform a so-called “right hit” or “left hit” via the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the probability of a jackpot between a case where a ball enters the first entrance 64 and a case where a ball enters the second entrance 640 is a high probability state even in a low probability state. However, although the same is the case, the probability of a 15R sure-change jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is that when a ball enters the second entrance 640, the ball enters the first entrance 64. Is set higher than when entering the ball. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, when the game state is normal, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so there is no electric accessory. The ball is fired toward the first entrance 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by obtaining a lot of opportunities. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  However, some players do not know that, as the specifications of the pachinko machine 10, the method of firing the ball must be changed between "left hit" and "right hit" according to the gaming state. In view of this, in the present pachinko machine 10, the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screens 811 and 812 for instructing the player to "left hit" or "right hit".

  Here, the hitting direction instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “left hit”, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram illustrating “right hit” to the player. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a hitting direction.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “left hit” is displayed on the lower left side of the third symbol display device 81 in front view as “← hit left !!”. This is a screen on which a symbol 811 is displayed. The design 811 includes a left-pointing arrow, and since the design 811 is arranged on the left side in the front view of the third design display device 81, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left hit” is displayed. Thus, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the ball is fired so that the ball passes on the left side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “hit right” is displayed on the lower right side in front view of the third symbol display device 81 as “hit right! Is displayed on the screen. Since the symbol 812 includes a right-pointing arrow, and the symbol 812 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the ball is fired so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound ramp control device 113 determines from the probability change time saving flag 223e whether or not the player may be left-handed when the game state is in the probability change or time reduction. Then, if there is a possibility that the player has left-handed, right-handed is more likely to be a 15R certain-change big hit during probable change or during working hours, and is advantageous for the player. A right-handing instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handing" (S2216 in FIG. 27). The display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the right hitting instruction screen display command. As a result, the player can be made to make the ball "hit right", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a possibility that the player is right-handed from the probability-change time reduction flag 223e when the game state is normal. If there is a possibility that the player has made a right-handed hit, during the normal time, the first entrance 64 is likely to ensure the starting prize, and many jackpot lottery opportunities are obtained. Is more advantageous for the player, and transmits a left-hitting instruction screen display command to the display control device 114 so as to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "left-hitting" on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 26, S2208). The display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left hit” shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the left hit instruction screen display command. As a result, the player can be encouraged to make the ball "left-handed", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  Returning to FIG. 9C, the description will be continued. The first through gate passage flag 223f is a flag indicating that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67. The second through gate passage flag 223g is a flag indicating that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. The first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g indicate that a ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 when both are on, and that when the ball is off, This indicates that the ball has not passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670.

  Both the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are set to OFF as initial values in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. When the sound ramp control device 113 receives a first through gate passage command that is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 and notifies that the ball has passed the first through gate 67, The MPU 221 sets the first through gate passage flag 223f to ON. Further, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives a second through gate passage command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 to notify that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670, The MPU 221 sets the second through gate passage flag 223g to ON.

  Here, the first through gate passage command is a command that the main control device 110 transmits to the audio amplifier control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67. . The second through gate passage command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio amplifier control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670.

  Although details will be described later with reference to the free chart of FIG. 26, the MPU 221 performs a right-handed / left-handed determination process. In this right-handed / left-handed determination processing, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the on / off state of the second through-gate passing flag 223g is checked and the second through-gate 670 is turned on within 10 seconds. When it is detected that three balls have passed, it is determined that the player is "right-handed" despite the fact that the ball is in normal operation, and a hit ball instructing "left-handing" that is advantageous to the player during normal time A left-turn instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability or working hours, three balls are put on the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds by watching the on / off state of the first through gate passage flag 223f. When it is detected that the player has passed, it is determined that the player is "left-handed" despite probabilistic change or working hours, and a "right-handed" instruction is given to the player during the probable change or working hours. A right hitting instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is more advantageous for the player to make a right-handed hit, the player makes a left-handed hit simply by passing one ball through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There is a device that determines that the player is performing the action and gives a notification instructing “right-handed”. However, even if the player is right-handed, it is quite possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the board, and that ball will be on the left side of the board. Passing through the through gate is also quite likely. Each time, if "right-handed" is instructed, the player is troublesome. Also, even if the player has left-handed, if a notification instructing "right-handing" is performed each time a ball passes through the through gate, the notification will occur frequently, After all, it makes the player feel troublesome.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the pachinko machine 10 detects that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 during 10 seconds, thereby detecting the normal pachinko machine. In step 3, a left hitting instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "left hitting" which is advantageous to the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the course of changing probability or working hours, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, the game is being played in the changing probability or working hours. A right-handing instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handing" which is advantageous to the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, despite the fact that the player has fired a ball in an advantageous direction, some balls are fired in a direction different from the advantageous direction, and a screen indicating the hitting direction is displayed one by one. Can be suppressed. Further, even if the player fires the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to prevent the screen instructing the hitting direction from being frequently displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screen for instructing the hitting direction by the player from hindering the interest in the game.

  The first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g are set to off at the stage of ending the right-handed / left-handed determination process executed by the MPU 221.

  The post-first through gate passage time counter 223h is a counter for counting the elapsed time since the ball passed through the first through gate 67. The second post-through-gate time counter 223i is a counter for counting the time elapsed since the ball passed through the second through-gate 670. The first through gate passing ball count counter 223j is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds. The second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the second through gate 670 for 10 seconds.

  The first post-through-gate passage time counter 223h, the second through-gate elapsed time counter 223i, the first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j, and the second through-gate passage ball number counter 223k are all RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. In the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22), 0 is set as the initial value. When the first through-gate passage time counter 223h and the second through-gate passage time counter 223i each have a value of 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0, the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is in a certain state or during a reduced working time. When this is detected, 1 is set to the first through-gate passing time counter 223h, and 1 is set to the first through-gate passing ball count counter 223j. In addition, when the value of the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is 0, the second through gate passing flag 223g is turned on during the normal game state, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. Then, 1 is set in the second through-gate passing time counter 223i, and 1 is set in the second through-gate passing ball counter 223k.

  The first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j detects that the first through-gate passage flag 223f is turned on and that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 even when the gaming state is in a certain state or during a reduced working time. And 1 is added. Further, the second through-gate passage ball number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when the second through-gate passage flag 223g is turned on while the game state is normal and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. You.

  When the value of the first through-gate passage time counter 223h and the second through-gate passage time counter 223i becomes a number other than 0, the counter update processing executed by the MPU 221 every millisecond (see FIG. 23). In S1912), an update process of adding 1 is performed. When the value of the first through-gate passing time counter 223h and the value of the second through-gate passing time counter 223i reach 10000, they are set to 0 again, and thereafter the values are maintained at 0. Further, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is set to 0 at the same time as the first through gate passing time counter 22h is set to 0. Similarly, the second through-gate passage ball count 223k is set to 0 at the same time that the second through-gate passage time counter 22i is set to 0.

  As a result, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, when the ball enters the first through gate 67 in a state where the gaming state is being changed or the time is reduced, is 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds). Is counted, and the number of balls that have passed through the first through gate 67 during the 10 seconds is counted by the first through gate passing ball counter 223j. In addition, the second through gate passing time counter 223i counts 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when a ball enters the second through gate 670 while the game state is normal and the value is 0, During the 10 seconds, the number of balls that have passed through the second through gate 670 is counted by the second through gate passing ball counter 223k.

  When the value of the first through-gate passing ball counter 223j is “2” while the game state is in the changing state or during working hours, the first through-gate passing flag 223f is turned on, and the ball passes through the first through gate 67. When it is detected that the ball has passed, it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is “left-handed” despite the fact that the player is in the process of changing probability or working hours, and the hit ball instructing “right-handing” that is advantageous to the player during the changing probability or working hours is reduced. A right-turn instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can perform “right hit” which is advantageous to the player during the probability change or during the time reduction. Can be directed to

  At the same time as transmitting the right-hitting instruction screen display command, “0” is set to the first through-gate passing time counter 223h and “0” is set to the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j.

  In addition, when the value of the second through-gate passing ball counter 223k is “2” during the normal game state, the second through-gate passing flag 223k is turned on, and the ball passes through the second through gate 670. Is detected, it means that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is “right-handed” despite the fact that the player is normal, and the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left-handing” that is advantageous to the player during normal is displayed on the third ball. A left-turn instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left hit”, and thus directs the player to perform “left hit” which is advantageous to the player during normal times. Can be.

  At the same time as transmitting the left-hitting instruction screen display command, “0” is set to the second through gate passing time counter 223i and “0” is set to the second through gate passing ball counter 223k.

  The RAM 223 includes a main control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and a display received by the display control device 114. A display control command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a variation start flag (not shown) indicating that a variation effect should be started in an ON state, and the like. have.

  Each of the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area is read, and the main command is read. The command is analyzed by the determination process, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  When the sound reproduction control process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the display command stored first among the unprocessed display commands stored in the display control command storage area is read. The audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command is read out from the audio data storage area 222a provided in the ROM 222 by the audio reproduction setting processing, and the read audio data is reproduced. A process of storing the data in the free channel area (one of the first to fourth channel areas) of the data storage area 223d is performed. Thereby, the sound output device 81 can output a sound that matches the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  The fluctuation start flag is set as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 24). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 25).

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

  The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio lamp control device. At the same time, a display command for notifying display contents to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to a video RAM 236 and an output port 239 via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different jackpot lottery probability and a different number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 controls display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on a command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area for storing a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time in an effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, reads out a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads out the display data table. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113, and includes, for example, a variable effect, a demo effect, A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  Note that the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect has stopped, A third symbol consisting of a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is finally displayed by receiving a final command (display final command) from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 after the variable effect. This is the effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is a departure symbol, an effect that emphasizes the departure is performed, and when the stop symbol is any one of a 15R probability variable hit, a 15R normal hit, and a 4R probability change hit, each of the hits is emphasized. Direction is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the confirmed display effect.

  The restart effect is, when the final command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, This is an effect of displaying an image obtained by vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and then the third symbol vibrates and is displayed, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  The display data table storage area 232a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect. The display data table for fluctuation which is the display data table for the fluctuation effect is prepared one by one according to the combination of the fluctuation effect pattern to be set and the stop symbol. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect, there are two types: one for confirming and displaying a stray symbol as a stop symbol; one for confirming and displaying a probable jackpot (15R probable jackpot or 4R probable jackpot); And a device for confirming and displaying the jackpot.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for fluctuation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. Rendering information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is defined in the display data table for fluctuation. This back type is any one of back A to C corresponding to the stage (one of “sea stage”, “palace stage”, and “deep sea stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Is displayed, or information for specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. However, instead of this, the back type and the state of the state corresponding to the back type are defined. Display state information indicating whether a back image should be displayed may be defined. The rear image is displayed with the display range, the brightness, the color tone, and the like changed over time. The display state information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the back image in the initial state is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the initial back image indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying an image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). You may. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing an image of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table). Based on the state of the rear image displayed at the stage and the time elapsed since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) was started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating an elapsed time from when the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table) according to the back type. The information may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display on the third symbol display device 81), or may include the type information of the display state information (along with the back type and the display state information). For example, the information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or an image may be drawn based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). ) May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is assigned a unique identification number for identifying each of the symbols. For example, the main symbol “0” is assigned an identification number “0”, the sub symbol between “0” and “1” is assigned an identification number “1”, and the main symbol “1” is assigned. Symbols are assigned “2” as identification numbers, and sub-designs between “1” and “2” are assigned “3” as identification numbers. As described above, the sub-designs are also given different identification numbers depending on the position where the sub-design is inserted (between the main designs).

  Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until the predetermined time has elapsed, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. Offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed, because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variable effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variable effect.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, the predetermined time at which the third symbol is switched from the offset information from the stop symbol of the preceding variable effect to the identification number of the third symbol to be actually displayed, The time is set so that it is displayed in a variable manner. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuations, the display content is defined as “high-speed fluctuation display”, and when displaying a mermaid character image, the display content is specified as “mermaid character display” and the light emission effect image is displayed. In this case, the display content is defined as “light emission effect display”.

  When the establishment of the probability change reach is displayed, “probability change establishment” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that has established the probability change reach. When displaying the establishment of the normal reach, “normal reach established” is defined as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that has established the normal reach. Also, when displaying the double reach, since both the probability change reach and the normal reach are established, first, as the display content, `` Probability change reach established '' is specified along with the type of the main symbol that established the probability change reach Further, "normal reach established" is defined along with the type of the main symbol that has established normal reach.

  The display contents specified in the display data table are used to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in a display data table buffer 233a described later provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233b is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233b is added based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233b, and the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output device 226 to output sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display command.

  When a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command representing the display contents is generated in order from the display contents specified previously, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device. Send to 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, the display data table firstly establishes the probability change reach as the display content at the address of the timing at which the establishment of the double reach is displayed. "Probable change reach established" is defined along with the type of main symbol, and then "normal reach established" is defined along with the type of main symbol that has established normal reach. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the constant-change reach, and then immediately sets the normal reach. It is configured to transmit a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has been established.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, and a time counter 233d.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. And stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233b by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, describing the contents of the instruction to draw an image with respect to is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 b, a display command representing the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the sound output device 226 to output sound corresponding to the display content notified by the display command.

  The pointer 233b is for specifying an address from which the corresponding drawing content should be obtained from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233b to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. )), The value of the pointer 233b is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233b is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and (See FIG. 13). Thus, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 13, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, an address at which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored is described. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address in the storage area 234a. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Performed processing, performed synthesis processing with other sprites according to α blending information, performed color tone correction processing according to color information, and performed filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information Above, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed on the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 stores, in the display data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number design). Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. You. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The time counter 233d is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process (see S2) is executed (S2603), the time counter 233d is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above-mentioned image data is stored in the form of compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing one frame of image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates one frame of image data according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and writes the one frame of image data written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one of the frame buffer areas of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

  The writing of one frame of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the reading of the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is performed. The image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area of the next frame.

  As described above, by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data between the one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up processing started when the power is turned on, a main processing executed after the start-up processing, and a regular start-up (in this embodiment, every 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When they reach 899, 99, 99, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 (S1105). Further, a through-gate passage process is performed in accordance with the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 (S1106). The details of the fluctuation process, the start winning process, and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16, 15, and 18, respectively.

  After the execution of the through gate passage processing, the emission control processing is executed (S1107), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S1108), and the timer interruption processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and starts. If there is a prize, a process of holding the values indicated by the various random number counters and a process of counting the number of held balls are executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S1201). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls NA) is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1202). Then, whether there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the variation effect accompanying the starting winning in the first entrance 64 is obtained. If the number of reserved balls NA is not smaller than 4 (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S1201: Yes) and if the number NA of retained balls of the variable effect accompanying the start prize in the first entrance 64 is <4 (S1202: Yes). , The value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is incremented by 1 (S1203), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter Each value of CS1 is stored in the first of the free reserved areas of the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

  Next, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number NA of the variable effect associated with the start winning at the first entrance 64 updated by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205). Move on to processing. The special figure 1 pending ball count command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1601 of the main processing (FIG. 20). In the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ball control device 113 determines the number of balls to be retained in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the number of reserved balls NA of the variable effect accompanying the winning at the first entrance 64 included in the special figure 1 number of reserved balls command. Manage numbers.

  In the subsequent processing of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable effect associated with the start winning to the second entrance 640). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1207). Then, whether or not there is a winning in the second entrance 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a winning in the second entrance 640, the variable effect of the start winning in the second entrance 640 is obtained. If the number of reserved balls NB <4 is not satisfied (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), and if the number of suspended balls NB <4 in the variable effect associated with the starting prize in the second entrance 640 (S1207: Yes). Then, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 (reserved ball number NB) is incremented by 1 (S1208), and a first random number counter C1, a first type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are added. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first area of the free reserve area of the special figure 2 reserve sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

  Next, the special figure 2 reserved ball count command including the value of the reserved ball count NB of the variable effect associated with the start winning at the second entrance 640, which is updated by the processing of S1208, is set (S1210), and the start winning is set. The process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process. The special figure 2 pending ball number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1601 of the main processing (FIG. 20). In the sound ramp control device 113, the sound ball control device 113 determines the number of balls to be retained in the sound ramp control device 113 based on the number of balls NB of the variable effect accompanying the winning in the second entrance 640 included in the special figure 2 number of balls command. Manage numbers.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 1X4), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S1301). The term "big hit" includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the time of the big hit and during the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the big hit is in progress (S1301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changed. If it is not in the middle (S1302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has stopped (S1303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Thereby, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (the third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the reserved ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640) is larger than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (reserved ball number NB) is greater than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (reserved ball number NB) ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

  This data shift process shifts the data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 2 reservation first area of the special figure 2 reservation ball storage area 203b to the special figure reservation ball execution area 203c. Reservation second area → special figure 2 reservation first area, special figure 2 reservation third area → special figure 2 reservation second area, special figure 2 reservation fourth area → special figure 2 reservation third area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

  After the data shift process, the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the second entrance 640. After indicating that the process is to be executed, a change start process (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and the present process ends. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing of S1304, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (reserved ball number NB) is not larger than 0, that is, the reserved ball number NB is 0, and the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 is achieved. (S1304: No), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the reserved ball of the variable effect accompanying the starting prize to the first entrance 64) is determined. It is determined whether the (number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

  As a result, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is not larger than 0, that is, the reserved ball number NA is 0, and the reserved ball accompanying the start prize to the first entrance 64 is held. If it is determined that there is no fluctuating effect (S1309: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA). Is subtracted by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved sphere storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

  This data shift process shifts data (each counter value) stored in the special figure 1 reservation first area of the special figure 1 reservation sphere storage area 203a to the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c. Reservation 2nd area → Special figure 1 reservation 1st area, Special figure 1 reservation 3rd area → Special figure 1 reservation 2nd area, Special figure 1 reservation 4th area → Special figure 1 reservation 3rd area, etc. The data (each counter value) in the area is shifted.

  After the data shift processing, the special figure type flag 203k is set to off (S1312), and the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is accompanied by the start winning at the first entrance 64. After indicating that the process is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, a variation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed, and the process ends.

  In this fluctuation processing, when it becomes possible to start the fluctuation effect (S1303: Yes), first, it is checked whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640 is suspended (S1304: Yes), Regardless of the value of the 1-reserved-ball counter 203d, that is, regardless of whether or not the fluctuating effect associated with the starting prize to the first entrance 64 is suspended, it is retained in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The variable effect is started based on the data (each counter value). Thereby, the big win lottery is performed with the start winning at the second entrance 640 prior to the start winning at the first entrance 64, and a variable effect is performed based on the big lottery. I have.

  In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S1313). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S1313: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S1314), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LEDs 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B, for example, the LED currently lit is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts. If there is, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and the blue LED is turned on. Then, a display mode in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuating time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S1313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S1315). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a fluctuation start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

  That is, by the processing of S1308, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and if the big hit, the first hit type counter is determined. Depending on the value of C2, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds will change to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots) or a 4R probability variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds will reach the high probability state after 4 rounds of jackpots) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a transitional jackpot to be shifted or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of the 15th round has been reached).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 4R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S1315, the stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. A determination command is set for determination in synchronization with lighting (S1316), and the process ends. When receiving the confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the elapse of the fluctuation time, and the stopped symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the change start process (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1308). This fluctuation start processing (S1308) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 16) of the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 14), and is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c. The lottery of "big hit" or "missing" (big hit lottery) is performed, and the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a jackpot lottery process for determining whether or not a jackpot is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c is performed (S1401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state (i.e., during normal and during working hours), "7,307,582" associated with the "low-probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is the jackpot random value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (that is, during the probability change), “28, 58, 85” associated with the “high probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a. , 122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836 , 866, 892 ”becomes the jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random numbers, and if they match, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. Determine.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag is ON to set the display mode at the time of the jackpot (S1402). . If the special figure type flag is ON (S1402: Yes), the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is executed along with the start winning prize to the second entrance 640. Therefore, a jackpot type table (see FIG. 8B) for the “second ball entrance” is set as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type (S1403).

  On the other hand, when the special figure type flag is OFF (S1402: No), the fluctuating effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is executed along with the start winning prize to the first entrance 64. Therefore, the jackpot type table for the “first ball entrance” (see FIG. 8B) is set as the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type (S1404).

  Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the process of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure reservation sphere execution area 203c, and the jackpot type is determined. The corresponding jackpot display mode is set (S1405).

  That is, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing in S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R certain variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 round jackpots. The first entry is based on whether the maximum number of rounds is a 4R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after four rounds of jackpots, or the maximum number of rounds is a 15R regular jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. In the case of a variable effect accompanying a start winning at the ball opening 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A (the lighting state of the LED 37Ab) is set, and in the case of a variable effect accompanying a start winning at the second ball opening 640. , The display mode of the first symbol display device 37B (the lighting state of the LED 37Bb) is set.

  In addition, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot) are stopped types in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as

  Here, in the case where a big hit is made in accordance with the prize to the first entrance 64, the big hit type is 1/4 according to the big hit type table for the "first entrance" (see FIG. 8B). With the probability of (= 25/100), it becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot, with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), it becomes a 15R regular jackpot, and with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), it becomes a 4R probability variable jackpot.

  On the other hand, when a big hit is made with the prize to the second entrance 640, the big hit type is set to 1/2 by the big hit type table for “the second entrance” (see FIG. 8B). With the probability of (= 50/100), a 15R probability change jackpot is obtained, with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), a 15R normal jackpot is obtained, and with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), a 4R probability change jackpot is obtained.

  As described above, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is that when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a ball enters the first entrance 64. It is set higher than the ball. On the other hand, as described above, the second entrance 640 is provided with the motorized accessory 640a, and the ease with which the ball can enter the second entrance 640 depends on the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, in normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) at the time of the big hit is determined (S1406). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (during normal operation, during time saving, during probable change), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the large hit fluctuation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is performed based on. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1406, in the case of a fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and the second entrance 640 is set. In the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning prize, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1401 that it is not a jackpot (S1401: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S1407). In the process of S1307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is displayed in the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64, and the variable effect of the variable effect accompanying the start winning at the second entrance 640. In this case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, the third symbol is displayed. As the type of stop to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is a front-rear reach, a reach other than the front-rear reach, or a complete departure. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. I have.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S1408). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (during normal operation, during time saving, during the probability change), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, the deviation variation pattern This is performed based on the table 202d (the outgoing (normal) variation pattern table 202d1, the outgoing (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1305, in the case of a fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning at the first entrance 64, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and the second entrance 640 is set. In the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning prize, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

  When the processing in S1406 or S1408 is completed, the type of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing in S1406 or S1408 is changed to the special figure 1 (variable effect accompanying the start winning prize to the first entrance 64) or the special figure 2 ( A fluctuation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set, including special figure type information indicating whether or not the second ball entrance 640 has a start-up winning prize (S1409).

  Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 21). You.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S1106). The through gate passage process (S1106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and determines whether a ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, and determines whether a ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending the acquired value. In the through gate passage processing, a first through gate passage command and a second through gate passage command for notifying the passage of a ball in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Process for

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the first through gate 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67. A pass command is set (S1502). The first through gate passage command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 21).

  Next, the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 203f (reserved ball number M in the variation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the general figure reserved ball number counter 203f is set to the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than (S1503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the first through gate 67, the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than four. If not (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the general-purpose reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S1504). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first to fourth areas of the reserved figure) in the reserved figure storage area 203i. (S1505), and proceeds to the processing of S1506.

  In the process of S1505, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f after the addition in the process of S1504 is referred to, and if the value is 1, the first ordinary drawing holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the figure-holding second area is set, if the value is 3, the figure-holding third area is set, and if the value is 4, the figure-holding fourth area is set. Area.

  In the processing of S1506, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506). Here, the passage of the ball through the second through gate 670 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: Yes), the sound ramp control device 113 is notified that the ball has passed through the second through gate 67. A pass command is set (S1507). The second through gate passage command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 21).

  Next, the value of the general figure reserved ball number counter 203f (reserved ball number M in the variation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the general figure reserved ball number counter 203f is set to the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than (S1508).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second through gate 670, the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than four. If not (S1508: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second through gate 670 (S1508: Yes) and the value (M) of the general-purpose reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1508: Yes), the general-purpose reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is incremented by 1 (S1509). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first to fourth areas of the reserved figure) in the reserved figure storage area 203i. (S1510), this process ends.

  In the process of S1510, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f after the addition in the process of S1509 is referred to, and if the value is 1, the normal drawing holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the figure-holding second area is set, if the value is 3, the figure-holding third area is set, and if the value is 4, the figure-holding fourth area is set. Area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, it is a flowchart showing an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1551). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1611 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1611 in such a case. As described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. 21, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1612, S1613).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701).

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S1101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command and the special figure 2 reserved ball number command set in the start winning processing (see FIG. 15) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, by this external output processing, the opening / closing operation of the large opening port 65a in the special game state at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command necessary for the fluctuation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like. If so, a command or the like necessary to display various screens on the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the movement type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). According to the opening / closing operation (closing condition), a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (a normal symbol, for example, a symbol of “。” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). In brief, when the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267 and the value of the second random number counter C4 has been reserved in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i, The value of the second random number counter C4 per second stored in the general-purpose reserved ball storage area 203i in the general-purpose reserved first area is shifted to the general-purpose reserved ball execution area 203j. At this time, each of the holdings is performed in the following manner, for example, the second area of the general drawing reservation, the first area of the general drawing holding, the third area of the general drawing holding, the second area of the general drawing holding, the fourth area of the general drawing holding, and the third area of the general drawing holding. The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

  Then, whether or not the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary figure holding ball execution area 203j matches the random number value to win is determined by lottery (winning lottery), and the random number value to win is determined. As the hit of the second symbol (normal symbol), the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed after the variable symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed. Then, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the ordinary figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the winning random number value, it is determined that the second symbol (normal symbol) is out of order. After the variable display of the second symbol is performed by the two symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a is kept closed.

  Note that different random numbers are set depending on whether the gaming state is normal, during working hours, or during probable change. That is, the number of random number values to be a hit in the normal game state is 149, and the value is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, when the gaming state is normal, it is determined to be a win. On the other hand, the number of random number values to be a hit during the time reduction or the probability change of the gaming state is 250, and the range is “1 to 250”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “1 to 250”, it is determined that the game is a win if the gaming state is during a time reduction or a probable change.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set to be shorter when the game state is during the time reduction or during the probable change than during the normal state. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined that the second symbol (normal symbol) has been hit is opened for a longer time when the gaming state is during the reduction of working hours or during the probable change than during the normal playing time.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set higher during the probable change and during the working hours, as compared with the normal time. Further, as described above, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal operation, the symbol “O” is easily displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( (Expanded state) increases. On the other hand, during the probable change and during the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change and during the working hours can be created as compared with the normal state.

  Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low even if the probability is large. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability that the 15R probability change jackpot is selected as the type of the jackpot selected in the case of the jackpot is the first entry port when the ball enters the second entry port 640. It is set higher than the case where the ball enters the ball 64. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640, and is in a state where a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, in normal times, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 to increase the chance of a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (a so-called “right-hit”), and aims at a 15R certain-variable big hit by entering the second entrance 640. However, this is advantageous for the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252, the power failure signal SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes from S1701 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1706, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 19 has been executed, the processing at S1710 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 22, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1920 (see FIG. 23). ) Is determined (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, when receiving a power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 23), sound lamp control device 113 executes a power-off process in S1920. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1920 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S1920 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  On the other hand, if the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1820, the sound lamp control is performed. This is started when the MPU 221 of the device 113 is reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and the process shifts to S1804 to start the initialization of the RAM 223.

  In the processing of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Move on to processing. By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1920 (see S1919 in FIG. 23). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1920 is executed, so that the process in S1920 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1920 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1808 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1808 to step S1806 is executed. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process skips S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1809 is skipped is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is performed via the process of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S1901 was executed (S1901). If the above has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1913 without performing the processes of S1902 to S1912.

  In the processing of S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. Processing in S1902 to S912 is related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1913, the right-hand / left-hand determination processing in S1914, the main command determination processing in S1915, and the audio reproduction setting processing in S1916 in a short cycle.

  By executing the main command determination process in S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. Since the audio reproduction setting process of S1916 is executed in a short cycle, the omission of reception of the display command transmitted from the display control device 114 is prevented, and the third command indicated by the display command without delay based on the display command. Sound reproduction according to the display content of the symbol display device 81 can be set.

  Since the fluctuation display processing in S1913 is executed in a short cycle, the setting relating to the fluctuation effect can be performed without delay based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination processing. In addition, by performing the right-handed / left-handed judgment processing in S1914 in a short cycle, the player can be operated without delay based on the first through-gate passage command and the second through-gate passage command received in the main command judgment processing. The third symbol display device 81 can display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit” or “left hit”.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1907 is omitted.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / production process, a lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / outputting process, in response to a display command from the display control device 113, in a sound reproduction setting process (S1916) to be described later, a reproduction sound data storage area 223d corresponds to a display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The audio data stored in the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d are respectively decoded, the decoded audio of all the channels is mixed, and the audio is output from the audio output device 226. When the output of the alarm sound is set, the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226.

  After the processing of S1910, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the processing in S1911, a counter update processing is executed (S1912), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated. For example, updating of the first through-gate passage time counter 223h and the second through-gate passage time counter 223i is performed in the process of S1912. Updating of the first through-gate passing time counter 223h and the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is maintained at 0 when the value is 0, and 1 when the value is 1 to 9999. Is added, and when the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  When the first through-gate passage time counter 223h receives the first through-gate passage command from the main controller 110, 1 is set. The second through-gate passage time counter 223i is set to the second through-gate passage time counter 223i by the main controller 110. 1 is set when a through gate pass command is received. The first through-gate passing time counter 223h and the second through-gate 223i are updated by the counter updating process executed every 1 millisecond, so that the first through-gate 67 and the second through-gate 670 are updated. The time until 10 seconds elapse after the ball passes can be counted.

  In the counter update process (S1912), the first through-gate passing ball counter 223j is set to 0 at the same time that the first through-gate passing time counter 22h is set to 0. Similarly, the second through-gate passing ball counter 223k is set to 0 at the same time as the second through-gate passing time counter 22i is set to 0.

  In the process of S1913, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a variable display process, which is a process set to transmit these generated commands to the display control device 114, is executed. Details of the variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the change display process, a right-handed / left-handed determination process is executed (S1914). This right-handed / left-handed determination processing includes a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a right-handed game that is advantageous to the player when it is determined that the player is making a left-handed game when the game state is during working hours or during a probable change. When the game state is normal, when it is determined that the player is right-handed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a left-handing advantageous to the player. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81. Details of the right-handed / left-handed determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  Next, a main command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1915). Details of the main command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the main command determination processing, in response to the display command received from the display control device 114, an audio reproduction setting processing for setting audio data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d is executed. (S1916). The sound data set in S1916 is decoded by the sound editing / output processing in S1910, and the sound is reproduced from the sound output device 226. The details of the audio reproduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1916 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power-off processing is executed (S1920). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1921), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main command determination processing (S1915). This main command determination processing (S1915) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Then, processing corresponding to the received command is performed. Hereinafter, the details of the main command determination processing will be described.

  In the main command determination processing, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command Is determined (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern types of variation effects to be started from now on (various normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, short reach, long, etc.) from the variation pattern command. (Departure) is extracted (S2002), and further indicates whether the fluctuating effect is due to the start winning at the first entrance 64 or to the start winning at the second entrance 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main processing.

  The variation pattern type and special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used in the later-described variation display process (see FIG. 25) when setting a variation pattern command for display to notify the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type to the display control device 114. . In addition, the special figure type information is obtained when the value of either one of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is decreased by 1 in the variable display processing in accordance with the start of the variable effect. Referred to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the change start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type (15R sure change big hit, 4R certain change big hit, 15R) indicated by the stop type command is set. Normal jackpots, complete departures, reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON, the start of the fluctuation effect is set, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the fluctuation effect. The stop type is a display stop for notifying the stop symbol in order to determine a stop symbol of the variable effect to be started in the variable display process (see FIG. 25) to be described later and to display the stop symbol at the determined stop symbol. Used to set a type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), then it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of balls in the fluctuation effect associated with the start winning to the first entrance 64, which is reserved in the main control device 110), and the extracted number is stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a of the audio lamp control device 113. It is stored (S2007).

  Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added together, and the sum is used as the number of fluctuation effects of the third symbol reserved in the main controller 110. , A display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S2008), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball count command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number design (● symbol) corresponding to the reserved ball number indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the reserved display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball count command has not been received (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2009). ). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball count command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (ie, , The number of balls that fluctuate with the start winning at the second ball entrance 640, which is reserved in the main controller 110), and the extracted number is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223 b of the sound lamp controller 113. It is stored (S2010). Then, the process proceeds to S2008, and as described above, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added, and the total value (total number of reserved balls) Is set to the display control device 114 for notifying the display control device 114 (S2008), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 pending ball count command has not been received (S2009: No), then it is determined whether or not the second through gate pass command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2011). . When it is determined that the second through gate passage command is received (S2011: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the second entrance 640, and the second through gate passage flag 223g is set to ON. (S2012), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second through gate passage command has not been received (S2011: No), then it is determined whether or not the first through gate passage command has been received from main controller 110 (S2013). When it is determined that the first through gate passage command has been received (S2013: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the first entrance opening 64, and the first through gate passage flag 223f is set to ON. Then (S2014), the main command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first through gate pass command has not been received (S2013: No), then it is determined whether or not a finalization command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2015). When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S2015: Yes), first, a display confirmation command for confirming and displaying the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is set (S2016). The display determination command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the stop symbol notified in advance by the display stop type command.

  After the process of S2016, it is determined from the stop type extracted in the process of S2005 and stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the stop symbol confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a probable big hit (S2017). Then, in the case of the probability change jackpot (S2017: Yes), 0 is set to a time saving counter (not shown) (S2018). In the present embodiment, the game state is set to be during the time reduction period during which 100 fluctuation effects are performed after the normal jackpot. The time reduction counter is used to count 100 fluctuation effects after a normal jackpot, and is set to "100" when a normal jackpot occurs, and every time a deviation is confirmed and displayed in a fluctuation effect performed thereafter. Is subtracted by 1. Then, when the time-saving counter reaches 0, the gaming state is returned from during time-saving to normal. If the normal jackpot again occurs during the time reduction, the number of times of the fluctuation effect in which the time reduction state is continued is set back to 100 by setting "100" in the time reduction counter again. Also, if the probability of a large change is reached during the working hours, the working hours counter is set to zero. Note that, in this case, the gaming state is in the probable change state, and is maintained in the probable change state until the next jackpot is established.

  After the processing in S2018, the probable change time reduction flag 223e is set to ON (S2021), indicating that the gaming state is in the probable change state. Then, the main command determination processing ends, and the process returns to the main processing.

  As a result of the process of S2017, when it is determined that the stop symbol confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not the probability change jackpot (S2017: No), then, the stop symbol that is definitely displayed is the normal jackpot or not. Is determined (S2019). As a result, if it is a normal jackpot (S2019: Yes), 100 is set to the time saving counter (S2020). As a result, 100 variable productions are counted after the game state is reduced to the time reduction period, and when the variable productions to be removed are repeated 100 times, the game state is changed from the time reduction to the normal state. After the process of S2020, the probability variable time reduction flag 223e is set to ON (S2021), indicating that the gaming state is during the time reduction. Then, the main command determination processing ends, and the process returns to the main processing.

  As a result of the processing in S2019, when it is determined that the stop symbol confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a normal jackpot (S2017: No), the stop symbol is a missing symbol. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is greater than 0 (S2022). If the time reduction counter is 0 (S2022: No), the main command determination processing is terminated as it is, and returns to the main processing. . On the other hand, if the time-saving counter is larger than 0 (S2022: Yes), the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S2023), and it is determined whether or not the subtracted time-saving counter is 0 (S2024).

  As a result, when the time saving number counter after the subtraction becomes 0 (S2023: Yes), since the variation state of being out of play has been repeated 100 times since the game state is in the middle of the time saving, the probable variable time saving flag 223e is turned off. (S2025) to indicate that the gaming state is normal. Then, the main command determination processing ends, and the process returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2023, if the time-saving counter after subtraction is not 0 (S2023: No), the main command determination processing is terminated and the processing returns to the main processing. As a result, the gaming state is maintained during working hours.

  Further, as a result of the processing in S2015, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S2015: No), it is next determined whether or not another command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2026). Then, if no other command has been received (S2026: No), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command has been received (S2026: Yes), processing corresponding to the other command is executed (S2027), the main command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  Next, the variable display processing (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variable display processing (S1913). This fluctuation display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to make the display change pattern command and the display stop type command based on the change pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, the generated display change pattern command and display stop type command are generated. Is set to be transmitted to the indicating control device 114.

  In the fluctuation display processing, first, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the variation pattern command and the stop type command have not been received from the main control device 110. The variable display process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the change start flag is turned off (S2102), and then, in the processing of S2102 in the main command determination processing (see FIG. 24), the change pattern command is used. The fluctuation pattern type (any of normal reach various, super reach various, special reach various, short-range, long-range) in the extracted fluctuation effect and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2105 are shown. , From the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, based on the value of the counter provided in the RAM 223 for determining the detailed variation pattern and the value of the counter for determining the stop symbol, and on the basis of the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired in the process of S2103, the detailed A variable pattern and a stop symbol are determined (S2104). Here, the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 includes only the variation time. However, in S2104, various detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time are set. One variation pattern is selected from among them, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of a variation effect to be executed. Further, the stop type notified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 indicates a rough stop type such as a 15R probability change jackpot, a 4R probability change jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, a complete departure, a front and rear departure reach, and a reach other than the front and rear departure. The stop symbol that matches the stop type is determined by the process of S2104.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. (S2105). In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol determined by the process of S2104 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and when the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. indicate.

  Next, the sound lamp control device 113 manages the time when the reserved ball is consumed in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball is set). In order to reduce the number of reserved balls, first, based on the special figure type information extracted in the processing of S2002, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect to be started this time is accompanied by the start winning prize to the first entrance 64, that is, the special figure 1 Is determined (S2107), and if the change is due to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (S2108). On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2107, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect to be started this time is accompanied by the start winning prize to the second entrance 640, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation effect is caused by the special figure 2 (S2107: No). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b (S2109).

  Then, after the processing of S2108 or S2109, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added, and the total value is held in the main control device 110. A display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 as the number of the fluctuation effects of the third symbol is set (S2110), the fluctuation display processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  The display reserved ball count command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number design (● symbol) corresponding to the reserved ball number indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the reserved display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the right-handed / left-handed determination processing (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 are flowcharts showing the right-handed / left-handed determination processing (S1914). This variable display processing (S1913) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. As described above, when the gaming state is during a time reduction or a probable change. If it is determined that the player is hitting the ball left, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and if the game state is normal, the game is played. If it is determined that the player is hitting right, the hitting direction instructing screen for instructing the player to make a left hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the right-handed / left-handed determination processing (S1914) will be described. In the right-hand / left-hand determination processing (S1914), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being performed (in a special game state) (S2201). If it is a big hit (S2201: Yes), the first through gate pass flag 223f and After resetting the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right / left determination processing ends.

  That is, in the case of a big hit, the right-handed / left-handed determination processing is not performed. In the case of a jackpot, regardless of whether the gaming state immediately before the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a certain change, a reduction in working hours, or a normal break, the variable effect of the jackpot is based on the start winning prize to the first entrance 64. Either the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened or closed depending on whether the winning is due to the starting winning of the second winning opening 640. I do. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a can indicate to the player in which direction the ball should be fired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, this processing ends without performing the right-handed / left-handed determination.

  However, if the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes during a big hit, the specific winning opening of the first variable winning device 65 is determined when it is determined that the player is right-handed. A hitting direction instructing screen for instructing the ball to be left to be easily won at 65a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes, the player makes a left hit. If it is determined that the ball has been played, the third symbol display device 81 may display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing a right-hit in which the ball is likely to win at the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Good.

  As a result of the processing of S2201, if it is not during the jackpot (S2201: No), then, it is determined whether or not the probable change time reduction flag 223e is off (S2202). As a result, if the certainty variable time reduction flag 223e is off (S2202: Yes), the gaming state is normal. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the player is right-handed, first, it is determined whether or not the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203). As a result, if the second through gate passage flag 223g is off (S2203: No), the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off (S2219), and then the right-hand left The hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S2203 is that the second through-gate passage flag 223g is ON (S2203: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the second through-gate passage time counter 223i is 0 (S2204). As a result, if the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is 0 (S2204: Yes), 1 is set to the second through-gate passing time counter 223i, and the second through-gate passing ball counter 223k is set. 1 is set (S2205). Then, after resetting the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to OFF (S2219), the right-hand / left-hand determination processing ends.

  Also, as a result of the processing in S2204, if the second through-gate after-passing time counter 223i is not 0 (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the second through-gate through ball counter 223k is 2 (S2207). ). As a result, if the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k is 1 instead of 2, (S2207: No), 1 is added to the second through-gate passing ball number counter 223k (S2210), and the first through gate passing number is determined. After resetting the flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-hand / left-hand determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2207, if the value of the second through-gate-passing-ball counter 223k is 2 (S2207: Yes), the process proceeds to S2208. Here, the update of the second through-gate passing time counter 223i is performed every millisecond by the processing of S1912 of the main processing (see FIG. 23) as described above, and is maintained at 0 when the value is 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined by the processing of S2204 that the second post-through-gate passage time counter 223i is not 0 (S2204: No), and the value of the second through-gate passage ball number counter 223k is 2 by the processing of S2207. When it is determined (S2207: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board in a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be right-handed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is normal, as described above, left-handed is more advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, in this case, a left-turn instruction screen display command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set (S2208). The display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left hit” shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the left hit instruction screen display command. As a result, the player can be encouraged to make the ball "left-handed", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  After the process of S2208, the second through gate passing time counter 223i is set to 0, the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is set to 0 (S2209), and the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223k are set. After resetting the through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed / left-handed determination processing ends.

  Also, as a result of the processing in S2202, when it is determined that the probable change time reduction flag 223e is ON (S2202: No), the gaming state is in the probable change state or is in the time reduction. Therefore, the flow shifts to the process of S2211 in FIG.

  In the processing of S2211, in order to determine whether or not the player is performing a left-handed operation, first, it is determined whether or not the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211). As a result, if the first through-gate passage flag 223f is off (S2211: No), the process moves to S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g are reset to off. After that (S2219), the right-hand / left-hand determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, as a result of the process of S2211, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first through gate passage time counter 223h is 0. (S2212). As a result, if the first through-gate passage time counter 223h is 0 (S2212: Yes), the first through-gate passage time counter 223h is set to 1 and the first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j is set. 1 is set (S2213). Then, the flow shifts to S2219 in FIG. 26, where the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off (S2219), and the right-hand / left-hand determination processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 27, as a result of the processing of S2212, if the first through-gate passage time counter 223h is not 0 (S2212: No), then, the first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j is 2 or not. Is determined (S2215). As a result, when the first through gate passage ball number counter 223j is not 2 but 1 (S2215: No), 1 is added to the first through gate passage ball number counter 223j (S2218), and the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. The processing shifts to the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g, reset to off (S2219), and ends the right-handed / left-handed determination processing.

  On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, if the value of the first through-gate-passing-ball counter 223j is 2 as a result of the processing in S2215 (S2215: Yes), the processing shifts to S2216. Here, the update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is performed every millisecond by the processing of S1912 of the main processing (see FIG. 23) as described above, and the value is maintained at 0 when the value is 0. On the other hand, when the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and when the value is 10000, initialization is performed to 0.

  Therefore, it is determined that the value of the first through-gate passing ball counter 223j is 2 by the process of S2212 by determining that the first through-gate after-passing time counter 223h is not 0 (S2212: No). When it is determined (S2215: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board in a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be left-handed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is during a certain change or during a reduction in working hours, as described above, right-handing is more advantageous for the player.

  Therefore, in this case, a right-turn instruction screen display command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set (S2216). The display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right strike” shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the right strike instruction screen display command. As a result, the player can be made to make the ball "hit right", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  After the processing of S2216, 0 is set to the first post-through-gate passage time counter 223h, and 0 is set to the first through-gate passage ball number counter 223j (S2217), and the process proceeds to S2219 of FIG. After resetting the first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-hand / left-hand determination processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the operation and effect of the right-handed / left-handed determination processing will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the passing of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handing” when the gaming state is in the changing state or during the working hours. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds, and (b) is a diagram showing the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds. It is the figure which showed the example at the time of a ball having passed at least three balls.

  Although FIG. 28 shows the case where the gaming state is during a probable change or during a reduction in working hours, the ball passes through the second through gate 67 and the hitting ball instructs “left hit” when the gaming state is normal. The relationship with the display of the direction instruction screen is also the same as the relationship between the passing of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handing" when the game state is in the changing state or during working hours. Since they are the same, the description is omitted.

  In FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the first through gate passage flag 223g is ON, it means that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67. Also, when the output of the right-hit instruction screen display command is “present”, it means that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-hit” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When two or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 during 10 seconds in the case where the playing state is in the changing state or during the working hours, first, the number of the balls passing through the first through gate 67 as shown in FIG. When the first ball passes through the first through gate 67 when the counter 223i is 0, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to one. Then, if the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds from the counting up, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to 2. However, when 10 seconds elapse after the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up, the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i is also updated by the counter updating process (S1912) of the main process (see FIG. 23). Initialized to 0. As a result, if only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 during 10 seconds, no right-handing instruction screen display command is output to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 The hit ball direction instruction screen for instructing "right hit" can be hidden.

  On the other hand, when three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds in the case where the gaming state is in the course of probable change or during working hours, as shown in FIG. When the first ball passes through the first through gate 67 when the gate passing ball counter 223i is 0, the first through gate passing ball counter 223i is counted up to one. Then, if the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds from the counting up, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to 2. Furthermore, if the third ball passes through the first through gate 67 before the first through-gate passing ball counter 223i has counted 10 seconds from the count-up, first, the right-handed / left-handed determination processing in S2216 (FIG. 27) By the processing in ()), a right-handed instruction screen display command is output to the display control device 114. With this, when the game state is in the course of probable change or during working hours, if three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 for 10 seconds, it is determined that the player has made a left-hand, and the third symbol is determined. The display device 81 can display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right hit”.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is more advantageous for the player to make a right-handed hit, the player makes a left-handed hit simply by passing one ball through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There is a device that determines that the player is performing the action and gives a notification instructing “right-handed”. However, even if the player is right-handed, it is quite possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the board, and that ball will be on the left side of the board. Passing through the through gate is also quite likely. Each time, if "right-handed" is instructed, the player is troublesome. Also, even if the player has left-handed, if a notification instructing "right-handing" is performed each time a ball passes through the through gate, the notification will occur frequently, After all, it makes the player feel troublesome.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probabilistic change or time reduction, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change or time reduction. A right-handing instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handing” which is advantageous to the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state, the pachinko machine 10 detects that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 within 10 seconds, and thereby the game is performed in the normal state. A left hitting instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “left hitting” which is advantageous to the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, despite the fact that the player has fired a ball in an advantageous direction, some balls are fired in a direction different from the advantageous direction, and a screen indicating the hitting direction is displayed one by one. Can be suppressed. Further, even if the player fires the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to prevent the screen instructing the hitting direction from being frequently displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screen for instructing the hitting direction by the player from hindering the interest in the game.

  Next, the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the audio reproduction setting process (S1916). In the sound reproduction setting process (S1916), as described above, in accordance with the display command received from the display control device 114, sound data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is set in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d. Processing. In the audio reproduction setting process, when two reach audios are being reproduced, a process of stopping the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach audio (the normal reach audio whose reproduction is started later) is also performed.

  In this audio reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach audio reproduction in-progress counter 223c is 2 (S2301). The reach voice reproducing counter 223c counts the number of reach voices being reproduced. If the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is not 2 but 0 or 1 (S2301: No), that is, if the reach voice is not reproduced or only one reach voice is reproduced, then the RAM 223 is executed. The first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in, and it is determined whether a reach display command has been received (S2302).

  If no reach display command has been received (S2302: No), it is further determined whether another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command has been received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored in the audio data storage area 222. The data is read out and set to the empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the reach audio reproducing counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2309), and the audio reproducing setting process ends. If it is determined as a result of the processing in S2307 that no other display command has been received (S2307: No), the sound reproduction setting processing ends as it is.

  When the reach display command is received as a result of the process of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is stored in the 0th symbol of the voice data storage area 222a. Read out from the normal reach voice data 222a0, the first symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2,... Ninth probability variation reach voice data 222a9, and read out the first to the first in the reproduction voice data storage area 223d. The vacant channel areas of the fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 are set and the reproduction of the reach voice is started (S2303). Then, 1 is added to the reach voice reproducing counter 223c (S2304), and the voice reproduction setting process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2301, when it is determined that the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 (S2301: Yes), since the two reach voices are being reproduced, the most recently reproduced reach The reproduction of the voice, that is, the reach voice whose reproduction has started last is stopped (S2305). Then, the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2306), and the voice reproduction setting process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the operation and effect of executing the audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for describing the reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed variation of the variation effect is displayed, when the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and when the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, double reach is performed. Is established and displayed, the display control unit 114 instructs the sound lamp control unit 113 to display the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. A reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probability change reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that established the probability change reach is used. Output the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the reproduction is started, the voiced section is immediately reproduced in the probability-change reach voice. Further, when the certain-reach reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice in-progress counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established, this time, the reach symbol (main design) for which the normal reach has been established is received. Outputs the normal reach sound corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the normal reach voice starts to be reproduced, a silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. When the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2, the sound ramp control device 114 stops the reproduction of the latest reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice that has been started to be reproduced later. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are reproduced once, but the reproduction of the normal reach voice is immediately stopped. , Only the probable reach voice will be played to the end. Since the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach voice is once reproduced, the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach has occurred in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device outputs a command for notifying “established reach” as a display content of the third symbol display device and “normal When a command for notifying "reach establishment" is received from the display control device, the positive-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the sound ramp control device 113 firstly outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2” and the number of reach voices being reproduced becomes two, the reach voice reproduced most recently, that is, the normal reach that has been started later is output. Stop playing audio. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are reproduced once, but the reproduction of the normal reach voice is immediately stopped. , Only the probable reach voice will be played to the end. Since the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach voice is once reproduced, the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach, Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted in accordance with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and the sound lamp control device 113 firstly, according to the received reach display command, Playback of two reach voices is started in order. Then, when determining that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach sound whose reproduction has been started most recently (the reach sound whose reproduction has started later). As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the positive change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is changed to the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, the player can hear only the probable reach voice. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in the processing load, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2”, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c stops the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach voice (the normal reach voice whose reproduction is started later). At the same time, it is initialized to “0”. Since the reproduction of the sure-change reach voice is continued, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c should normally be set to "1". However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach voice that is reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the reproduction is performed. After the stop control is performed, at least as long as the certain-reach reach voice is being reproduced, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, if the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is initialized to "0" at the same time as the stop of the latest reach voice (normal reach voice started to be reproduced later) is stopped, the reach voice is being reproduced. In order to initialize the counter 223c to "0", it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of the surely-variable reach voice, so that the processing can be simplified.

  The reach voice reproducing counter 2232c is also initialized to “0” when another display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. When another display command is received while the reach voice is being reproduced, the reach voice is continuously reproduced. Therefore, the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c should be set to “1”. However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach voice to be reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two reach display commands are continuously transmitted from the display control device 81, and the reach voice is reproduced. If another display command is received during this, it can be determined that the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, at least while the reach sound is being reproduced, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when another display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the sound ramp control device 113, the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is initialized to “0”, and the reach voice reproduction is performed. In order to initialize the middle counter 223c to “0”, it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of the reach voice, so that the processing can be simplified.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a MPU 231 that detects a V interruption signal. There is a V interrupt process that is executed in the event of a V interrupt. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. I do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Also, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  After the process of S2401, interruption permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 13) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  In this V interrupt processing, first, a command determination processing (S2602) is executed, and then, a display setting processing (S2603) is executed. In the command determination processing (S2602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. Are set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect or the continuous announcement effect selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. Can be controlled so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the display setting process (S2603), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S1402) or the like, the third symbol display device is displayed based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. At 81, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the address indicated by the pointer 233b specifies the display content (see FIG. 12) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on, A display command for notifying the display contents to the sound lamp control device 113 is generated, and processing for transmitting the generated display command to the sound lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are sequentially determined from the display contents specified first. A display command is generated, and the display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, the display data table firstly establishes the probability change reach as the display content at the address of the timing at which the establishment of the double reach is displayed. "Probable change reach established" is defined along with the type of main symbol, and then "normal reach established" is defined along with the type of main symbol that has established normal reach. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the constant-change reach, and then immediately sets the normal reach. It is configured to transmit a reach display command for notifying reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has been established.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like (for example, the display variation) in the display control device 114 by the command determination process and the display setting process. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to the pattern command) or the like, the display data table should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. The effect image can be changed.

  When a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the system becomes complicated and diversified with the effect image. Since a great deal of load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2604). In this task process, based on the content of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S1404), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S1405) are used. , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sets the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Send a reach display command to notify reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that was established, and then immediately send a reach display command to notify reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach . On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command, it temporarily outputs a reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command. When it is determined that the number of reach voices being reproduced is two, the reproduction of the reach voice whose reproduction has been started most recently (the normal reach voice whose reproduction has started later) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the case of the double reach or the single reach, when the positive change reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probability change reach to the audio ramp control device 113, and after 10 milliseconds elapses, issues a normal reach audio reproduction stop command by an audio ramp. Transmit to control device 113. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the positive change reach. As in the first embodiment, immediately after the reach display command is transmitted, the reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. However, in the second embodiment, the display control device 114 transmits the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach to the sound lamp control device 114, A normal reach voice reproduction stop command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 114 after 10 ms elapses after the reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has achieved the reach. This is different from the first embodiment.

  Then, in the second embodiment, when the normal ramp sound reproduction command is received from the display control device 114, the sound ramp control device 113, if there is only one reach sound being reproduced at that time, changes the probability change signal transmitted before that. Based on the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the reach, only the probable reach voice is output as audio, so that the output of the probabilistic reach voice is continued. On the other hand, in the case where two reach voices are being reproduced when the normal reach voice reproduction command is received from the display control device 114, double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probability change reach is established. Based on the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol and the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that has established the normal reach, the constant reach voice and the normal reach audio Are reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 continues to output the certain-reach reach voice, while stopping the output of the normal reach voice.

  In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 establish the probability change reach. After transmitting a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has been made to the sound ramp control device 113, when 10 milliseconds elapse, a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. Except for this, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 33 illustrates an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. In this audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2311 is executed instead of the process of S2301 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

  In the process of S2311, the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S2311). Then, if the normal reach audio reproduction stop command is not received, the same processing of S2302 to S2304, S2307 to S2309 as in the first embodiment is executed. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2311, if the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c is 2 or not (S2312).

  As a result, if the value of the reach audio reproduction in-progress counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the audio reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. If the value of the reach voice reproduction in-progress counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No) in a state where the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), the certain symbol reach as the single reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After a reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound ramp control device 113 to notify that the reach has been established together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, usually after 10 milliseconds, This is a case where a reach voice reproduction stop command is received. Therefore, in this case, only the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced, and the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice can be continued by ending the voice reproduction setting process as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2312, when the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 (S2312: Yes), the same processes of S2305 and S2306 as in the first embodiment are executed. That is, in the process of S2305, the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach voice, that is, the last reach voice to be reproduced is stopped (S2305).

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 (S2312: Yes) in the state where the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received (S2311: Yes), double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on a reach display command that notifies reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, and a reach display command that notifies reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach. This is a case where a normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received while the probability-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are being reproduced. Therefore, in this case, the reproduction of the normal reach sound can be stopped by stopping the reproduction of the reach sound whose reproduction has been started most recently by the process of S2305.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34, an operation and an effect by executing the audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 34A is an explanatory diagram for describing the reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for describing reproduction of reach voice when a single reach of a probable change reach is displayed.

  First, referring to FIG. 34 (a), on the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed variation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol column Z3 is displayed at the low speed. When the display is stopped and displayed, when the double reach is established and displayed, the display control device 114 instructs the sound lamp control device 113 to display the third symbol display device 81 first as the probability change reach. Sends a reach display command to notify reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that has established, and then immediately sends a reach display command to notify reach establishment along with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach I do.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probability change reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that established the probability change reach is used. Output the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the reproduction is started, the voiced section is immediately reproduced in the probability-change reach voice. Further, when the certain-reach reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice in-progress counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established, this time, the reach symbol (main design) for which the normal reach has been established is received. Outputs the normal reach sound corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the normal reach voice starts to be reproduced, a silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. When the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the display control device 114 transmits the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probability change reach has been established, the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is transmitted 10 ms after the transmission. 113. When the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received and the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2, the voice ramp control device 113 starts the most recently reproduced reach voice, that is, starts the reproduction later. Stop playing the normal reach audio that was played. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are once reproduced, but the normal reach voice is reproduced as the positive reach voice. When about 10 milliseconds have elapsed since the start of the playback, the reproduction is stopped, and only the positively-reachable reach sound is played back to the end. Since the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach voice is once reproduced, the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. .

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach has occurred in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device outputs a command for notifying “established reach” as a display content of the third symbol display device and “normal When a command for notifying "reach establishment" is received from the display control device, the positive-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the sound ramp control device 113 firstly outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command. On the other hand, when a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114 from the display control device 114, the reproduction of the latest reach sound reproduced, that is, the normal reach sound whose reproduction is started later is stopped. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are reproduced once, but the normal reach voice starts to reproduce the positive reach voice. After about 10 milliseconds, the reproduction is stopped, and only the probability change reach sound is reproduced to the end. Since the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach voice is once reproduced, the normal reach voice is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. . Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach, Immediately, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted in accordance with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and the sound lamp control device 113 firstly, according to the received reach display command, Playback of two reach voices is started in order. Then, upon receiving the normal reach sound reproduction stop command after the two reach sounds have been reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 reproduces the reach sound whose reproduction has started most recently (the reach sound whose reproduction has started later). Stop. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the positive change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is changed to the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, the player can hear only the probable reach voice. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in the processing load, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34 (b), in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed variation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped from the low-speed display, and the lower symbol column Z3 is further displayed. In the case where the display is stopped from the low-speed display and the certain reach is established and displayed as the single reach, the display control device 114 instructs the sound lamp control device 113 to display the third symbol display device 81 as: The reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, it corresponds to the reach symbol (main design) that established the probability change reach. Output a certainty variable reach voice. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the reproduction is started, the voiced section is immediately reproduced in the probability-change reach voice. Further, when the certain-reach reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice in-progress counter 223c becomes 1.

  When the display control device 114 transmits the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probability change reach has been established, the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is transmitted 10 ms after the transmission. 113. When the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received, if the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 1, the voice ramp control device 113 ends the voice reproduction setting process. As a result, it is possible to continue the output of the probability change reach sound.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the audio lamp control device 113 temporarily sets the double reach according to the reach display command from the display control device 114. After outputting the probable-change reach voice to be composed, the normal reach voice is output. After that, when it is determined that the number of reach voices being reproduced is two, the reach voice that has recently started reproduction (the normal Reach sound) stopped playing. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reach voices being reproduced is two, the reach voice that has recently started reproduction, that is, the normal reach voice that has started reproduction later, is determined. Overwrites all audio data with silence data.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except for a part of a sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 35 illustrates an audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. In the audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2321 is executed instead of the process of S2305 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

  That is, when it is determined that the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 as a result of the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), since the two reach voices are being reproduced, the latest, that is, the last Then, the audio data set in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d is overwritten with silent data (S2321). Then, after the processing of S2321, the same processing of S2306 as in the first embodiment is executed, and the sound reproduction setting processing ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, an operation and an effect by executing the audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for describing reproduction of reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed variation of the variation effect is displayed, when the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and when the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, double reach is performed. Is established and displayed, the display control unit 114 instructs the sound lamp control unit 113 to display the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. A reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probability change reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that established the probability change reach is used. Output the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the reproduction is started, the voiced section is immediately reproduced in the probability-change reach voice. Further, when the certain-reach reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice in-progress counter 223c becomes 1.

  Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established, this time, the reach symbol (main design) for which the normal reach has been established is received. Outputs the normal reach sound corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the normal reach voice starts to be reproduced, a silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. When the normal reach sound is output, the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c becomes 2.

  When the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes 2, the voice ramp control unit 114 sets the reproduced voice data storage area in which the voice data of the most recently reproduced reach voice, that is, the voice data of the normal reach voice that has started playing later, is set. The silent data is overwritten on any one of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the 223d. As a result, silence continues to be output as the normal reach sound whose reproduction has been started later.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach has occurred in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device outputs a command for notifying “established reach” as a display content of the third symbol display device and “normal When a command for notifying "reach establishment" is received from the display control device, the positive-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the sound ramp control device 113 firstly outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c becomes “2” and the number of reach voices being reproduced becomes two, the reach voice reproduced most recently, that is, the normal reach that has been started later is output. Silence will continue to be reproduced as audio. Thereby, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, two of the positive reach voice and the normal reach voice are reproduced. However, since the normal reach voice is reproduced as silence, only the positive reach voice is reproduced. Will be heard by the player. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment can achieve the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and third embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command for the time being. did. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) after receiving the reach display command. Until elapses, even if a display command is received from the display control device 114, the display command is ignored.

  In the fourth embodiment, the normal reach voice does not require a silent section of 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments, and the normal reach voice is started to be reproduced in the same manner as the probability-variable reach voice. Then, a sound section such as “Reach!” Is immediately played. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 except for a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as the first and third embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first matches the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. A reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment has a post-reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l instead of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c of the RAM 223 in the first and third embodiments.

  The after-reach sound reproduction start time counter 223l is a counter that counts an elapsed time from the start of the reach sound reproduction. The time counter 221 after the start of the reach voice reproduction is set to 0 as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. When the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

  When the reproduction of the reach voice is started, the MPU 223 sets 1 to a time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction. If the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction becomes a number other than 0, the updating process in which 1 is added in the counter updating process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every millisecond. Done. When the value of the after-reach sound reproduction start time counter 223l becomes 20, the value is set to 0 again, and thereafter, the value is maintained at 0. This allows the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction to count 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

  The post-reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l is referred to in the audio reproduction setting process (S1916), and displays a display command from the display control device 114 while the post-reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l indicates a value other than 0. Even if received, the display command is ignored.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment.

  In the audio reproduction setting process according to the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a time counter 223l after the start of the reach audio reproduction is 0 (S2331). As a result, if the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is 0 (S2331: Yes), the first display received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223. The command is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a normal reach voice reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command has been received (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is stored in the 0th design normal reach voice data 222a0, 222a in the voice data storage area 222a. Read out from the first symbol probability reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2,... The ninth symbol probability reach voice data 222a9, and read the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 of the reproduction voice data storage area 223d. 223d4 are set to empty channel areas, and reproduction of reach voice is started (S2303).

  Then, 1 is set to the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction (S2332). Then, the sound reproduction setting process ends. By the process of S2332, the post-reach sound reproduction start time counter 223l is incremented by 1 until the value becomes “20” in the counter update process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond, and the value is increased. When the value becomes "20", an update process for initializing the value to "0" is performed. That is, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction starts counting 20 milliseconds from the start of the reach voice reproduction.

  As a result of the process of S2302, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command has been received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored in the audio data storage area 222. The data is read out and set to the empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the sound reproduction setting process ends. If no other display command has been received as a result of the processing in S2307 (S2307: No), the sound reproduction setting processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2331, when it is determined that the time counter after the start of the reach voice reproduction is not 0 (S2331: No), it is determined whether a display command has been received (S2333). As a result, if the display command has not been received (S2333: No), the sound reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. If the display command has been received (S2333: Yes), the received display command is deleted (S2334), and the sound reproduction setting process ends.

  The time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction has a value other than 0 for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction. Therefore, the display command received from the display control device 114 is ignored for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reproduction of the reach voice.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39, an operation and an effect by executing the audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for describing the reproduction of the reach voice when double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed variation of the variation effect is displayed, when the upper symbol column Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and when the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, double reach is performed. Is established and displayed, the display control unit 114 instructs the sound lamp control unit 113 to display the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. A reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probability change reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that established the probability change reach is used. Output the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the reproduction is started, the voiced section is immediately reproduced in the probability-change reach voice. Also, when the certain-reach reach voice is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is set to 1. Then, the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction counts 20 milliseconds, and takes a value other than 0 during that time.

  Next, the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. This command is received immediately after 20 milliseconds after receiving the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type. That is, when the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is received together with the type of the reach symbol in which the normal reach is established, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction takes a value other than 0. Command is ignored. Therefore, the normal reach voice is not output.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach has occurred in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device outputs a command for notifying “established reach” as a display content of the third symbol display device and “normal When a command for notifying "reach establishment" is received from the display control device, the positive-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114 when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the received reach display command is first received. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction becomes a value other than 0, and the next reach display command received is ignored. That is, a normal reach sound is not output by a reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach, Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted in accordance with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and the sound lamp control device 113 according to the reach display command received earlier, Only the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probability change reach voice) is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the positive change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is changed to the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, the player can hear only the probable reach voice. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in the processing load, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all, so that the normal reach sound does not require a silent section of 20 ms as in the first to third embodiments, Similarly to the sure-change reach voice, when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started, a voiced section such as “reach!” Can be immediately reproduced. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the single reach, when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started, the voice such as “Reach!” Can be immediately reproduced.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments, the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are provided in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound data for reproducing the reach sound is provided. Is set in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a reach audio area 223d5 is provided in the reproduced audio data storage area 2232d instead of the fourth channel area 223d4, and the audio data for reproducing the reach audio is based on the reach data. It is set in the audio area 223d5. In addition, even if a reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio ramp control device 113 during the reach audio set in the reach audio area 2232d5, the reach display command is ignored.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the normal reach voice does not require a silent section of 20 ms as in the first to third embodiments, and the normal reach voice starts to be reproduced. Then, the sound section such as "reach!" Is immediately reproduced. The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 except for a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. This is the same as the first, third, and fourth embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first matches the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach. A reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. The reproduction audio data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a reach audio area 223d5 instead of the fourth channel area 223d4. The RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment includes a reach audio area in-use flag instead of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c according to the first and third embodiments and the reach audio reproduction start time counter 223l according to the fourth embodiment. 223 m.

  The reach voice area 223d5 is a dedicated area for exclusively storing voice data for reproducing the reach voice. When the MPU 221 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 receives voice data (the 0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0, the first symbol reliable reach voice data 222a1, and the second symbol) corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command. .., The ninth symbol positive-change reach voice data 222a9) is read from the voice data storage area 222a, and the read reach voice data is stored in the reach voice area 223d5.

  The MPU 221 decodes audio data stored in the first to third channel areas 223d1 to 223d and the reach audio area 223d5, and generates an audio signal. Then, the audio signal generated for each audio reproduction channel is mixed and then output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be simultaneously reproduced and output from the audio output device 226.

  The reach voice area in-use flag 223m is a flag indicating that the reach voice data is set (stored) in the reach voice area 223m, and that the reach voice is being reproduced using the set reach voice data. is there. When the reach voice area in use flag 223m is on, it indicates that the reach voice is being reproduced using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m. When the reach voice area in use flag 223m is off, the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m indicates that the reach voice is not being reproduced.

  The reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to OFF as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, the reach lamp command is received from the display controller 114 by the sound ramp control device 114, the reach sound data is set in the reach sound area 223d5, and the reach sound data set in the reach sound area 223d5 is used. Then, when the output of the reach voice is started, the reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to ON. If another reach display command is received from the display control device 114 when the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is on, the reach display command is ignored. When the reach voice reproduction using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223d5 ends, the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to off.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a sound reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment.

  In this audio reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the reach voice currently being reproduced has ended reproduction (S2341). If it is determined that the reproduction has not been completed (S2341: No), then the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is displayed from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223. It is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a normal reach sound reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

  As a result, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command has been received (S2307: Yes), the audio data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is stored in the audio data storage area 222. The data is read out and set to the empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and the audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the sound reproduction setting process ends. If no other display command has been received as a result of the processing in S2307 (S2307: No), the sound reproduction setting processing ends as it is.

  As a result of the process of S2302, if the reach display command has been received (S2302: Yes), it is determined whether the reach voice area in use flag 223m is off (S2342). As a result, if the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is off (S2342: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is stored in the 0th symbol normal reach of the voice data storage area 222a. The voice data 222a0, the first symbol positive reach voice data 222a1, the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2,. , And the reproduction of the reach voice is started (S2343). Then, the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is set to ON (S2344), and the voice reproduction setting process ends.

  If the reach voice area in-use flag 223m is ON as a result of the process of S2342 (S2342: No), the received reach display command is deleted (S2335), and the voice reproduction setting process ends.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2341, if it is determined that the reach voice that has been reproduced so far has finished reproducing (S2341: Yes), the reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to off (S2346), and the voice The reproduction setting process ends.

  Here, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first establishes the probability change reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. A reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol that has been made, and immediately thereafter, a reach display command for notifying reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol that has established normal reach.

  At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probability change reach, the reach design that has established the probability change reach is performed by the sound reproduction setting process. The audio data for reproducing the sure-variable reach voice corresponding to the (main symbol) is set in the reach voice area 223d5, and the reproduction of the certain-variable reach voice is started. At this time, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use and the reach voice area in use flag 223m is turned on until the reproduction of the probability change reach voice is completed.

  Next, the voice lamp control device 114 receives a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established. This command is received immediately after the reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type. That is, when the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is received together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use, and the reach voice area use flag 223m is set. It is on. As a result, the reach display command is ignored, and the normal reach voice is not output.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when double reach has occurred in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device outputs a command for notifying “established reach” as a display content of the third symbol display device and “normal When a command for notifying "reach establishment" is received from the display control device, the positive-change reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, the probability variation reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices in accordance with the character design corresponding to the main design that has become the reach design. There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

  In addition, it is conceivable to make the reach voices easier to hear by completely overlapping and outputting the words uttered by the respective voices in the probability change reach voice and the normal reach voice. However, the timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform because only the voice is different, and lacks interest. Also, in the first place, to completely overlap the words uttered in the respective voices in terms of timing, the outputs of the reach voices must be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates the control. The problem also arises.

  On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare audio data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare audio data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and positive variation symbol) that have achieved double reach. There is a possibility that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114 when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the received reach display command is first received. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use, and the next reach display command received is ignored. That is, a normal reach sound is not output by a reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certainty variable reach, Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted in accordance with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, and the sound lamp control device 113 according to the reach display command received earlier, Only the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probability change reach voice) is output. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is the positive change reach or the normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is changed to the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed, the player can hear only the probable reach voice. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing an increase in the processing load, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all, so that the normal reach sound does not require a silent section of 20 ms as in the first to third embodiments, Similarly to the sure-change reach voice, when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started, a voiced section such as “reach!” Can be immediately reproduced. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the single reach, when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started, the voice such as “Reach!” Can be immediately reproduced.

  The “third design” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims, and the "regular big hit" described in the above claims corresponds to the "first game" described in the claims. The “probable jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second game value” described in the claims. The “normal reach” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first production mode” described in the claims, and the “probable reach” described in the above embodiments is the “second reach” described in the claims. The "double reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third effect mode" described in the claims. The “normal reach voice” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first voice” described in the claims, and the “probable reach voice” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first voice” described in the claims. 2 voice ". The “normal state” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “first state” described in the claims, and the “probable change” and “medium time” described in the embodiments are described in the claims. This corresponds to the “second state”.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in the first to third embodiments, the case where the number of reach voices being reproduced is counted between 0 and 2 by the reach voice reproduction counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice ramp control device 113 will be described. However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c may be constituted by a 1-bit counter. In this case, the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in an initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, when a reach display command for notifying the reach is received from the display control device 114 and the playback of the reach voice is started, the MPU 221 adds 1 to the value of the reach voice in-play counter 223c.

  Here, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying that the reach has been established, together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the certain-variable reach. Then, immediately after that, a reach display command for notifying of the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach. Therefore, in this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the second normal reach, the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is set to 0. Becomes

  The sound ramp control device 113 starts reproduction of the reach voice, adds 1 to the reach voice reproduction counter 223c, checks the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c, and if the value is 0, 2 Judgment is made that one reach voice is being reproduced, and the most recent reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice that has been started to be reproduced later is stopped, or the normal reach voice that has been started to be reproduced later is stopped. Silence data is overwritten on the audio data set in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d for reproduction. Alternatively, when a normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114 and the value of the reach sound reproducing counter 223c is 0, it is determined that two reach sounds are being reproduced, and the most recent sound is reproduced. The reached voice, that is, the audio data set in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d in order to stop the reproduction of the normal reach audio whose reproduction has been started later or to reproduce the normal reach audio whose reproduction has been started thereafter. On the other hand, the silent data is overwritten.

  Also in these cases, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  When the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is configured by a 1-bit counter, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c receives a display command other than the reach display command from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, it may be initialized to “0”.

  In the second embodiment, when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 reproduces the latest reach sound when it is determined that two reach sounds are being reproduced. Although the description has been given of the case where the reproduction of the reach voice, that is, the reproduction of the normal reach voice which has been started later is stopped, the reproduction voice data is not used to stop the reproduction but to reproduce the normal reach voice which has been started later. Silent data may be overwritten on the audio data set in the storage area 223d. Also in this case, similarly to the second embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  In the first to third embodiments, in the case where the normal reach sound is reproduced in the sound ramp control device 113, the case where the silence period is 20 milliseconds after the start of the reproduction has been described. The length of time need not necessarily be 20 milliseconds. When double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the time required from the start of reproduction of the normal reach sound by the sound lamp control device 113 to the stop of the reproduction, or the reproduction of the normal reach sound. If it is longer than the time required from the start until the sound data set in the reproduction sound data storage area 223d for reproducing the normal reach sound is overwritten with the silence data, the silence section of the normal reach sound is 20 It may be shorter or longer than millisecond.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, all the display commands from the display control device 114 are transmitted for 20 milliseconds after the reproduction of the reach sound is started. Although the case of ignoring has been described, the time for ignoring the display command does not necessarily need to be 20 milliseconds. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sound ramp control device 113 starts the reproduction of the variable probability reach voice based on the first reach display command transmitted from the display control device 114. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reach display command (the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach) transmitted from the display control device 114. As long as the time is longer than the time required for the determination, the time for ignoring the display command may be any length.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it ignores all display commands from the display control device 114 for a predetermined second after starting the reproduction of the reach voice. Although the description has been given of a case in which the playback of the reach voice is started, it may be configured such that only the reach display command is ignored for a predetermined time after starting the playback of the reach voice, or only some commands including the reach display command are ignored. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  In the first to third embodiments, when a double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 firstly notifies that the reach has been established together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the constant-change reach. A description has been given of a case in which a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach is transmitted in combination with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach has been established, but two reach display commands are transmitted immediately thereafter. May be reversed. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, Then, immediately after, the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment may be transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol in which the normal reach is established. In this case, as a modified example of the first embodiment, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 reproduces the normal reach sound that has been reproduced first, and The reach voice may be stopped while the silent section is being reproduced. Alternatively, as a modified example of the second embodiment, if the two reach sounds are being reproduced when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the reproduction first. The reproduction of the started normal reach voice may be stopped while the normal reach voice is reproducing a silent section. Alternatively, as a modified example of the third embodiment, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that two reach sounds are being reproduced, the sound ramp control device 113 reproduces the normal reach sound that has been reproduced first to reproduce the normal reach sound. Silence data may be overwritten on audio data set in the data storage area 223d. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player hear only the sure-change reach voice.

  In each of the above embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 has four sound reproduction channels and is configured to be able to reproduce sound for four channels. However, the sound lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. 113 may have a plurality of audio reproduction channels and be configured to be able to reproduce the audio of the plurality of channels.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the game state is normal, the passage of the ball to the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are moved to the second through gate in 10 seconds. Although the case where it is determined that the player is right-handed when passing 670 has been described, the right-handed determination condition is merely an example, and a ball having a predetermined number of balls equal to or more than 2 during a predetermined time is the second ball. What is necessary is just to be configured to determine that the player is right-handed when passing through the through gate 670.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the gaming state is in the process of probable change or during working hours, the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are monitored within 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player has left-handed when passing through the first through gate 67 has been described. However, the left-handed determination condition is an example, and the number of balls having a predetermined number of balls equal to or more than two during a predetermined time is described. What is necessary is just to be configured so that when the ball passes through the first through gate 67, it is determined that the player has left-handed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a leftward or rightward instruction given to the player is performed by displaying a hitting direction instruction screen on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 10. The instruction of left-handing or right-handing is not necessarily limited to the case where the display is performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a lamp (for example, an arrow-shaped lamp) for instructing left-handing or right-handing is provided by a pachinko machine. The machine 10 may be provided at a position visible when viewed from the front, and this lamp may be turned on or blinked to instruct the player to make a left or right strike. Alternatively, a right-handed or left-handed instruction may be output by voice from the voice output device 226.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether the player is right-handed or left-handed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. This may be performed by the device 114. In this case, upon receiving the first through-gate passage command from main controller 110, audio lamp control device 113 instructs display control device 114 to display the first through-gate 67 indicating that the ball has passed through first through gate 67. What is necessary is just to transmit a through gate passage command. Further, upon receiving the second through gate passage command from main controller 110, audio lamp control device 113 instructs display control device 114 to display the second through gate for display indicating that the ball has passed through second through gate 670. What is necessary is just to transmit a gate passage command.

  The main controller 110 may determine whether the player is right-handed or left-handed. The main control device 110 originally grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and also receives a switch for detecting the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670. Therefore, main controller 110 can easily make the determination. When the main control device 110 determines whether the player is right-handed or left-handed, the main control device 110 determines that the player is right-handed during the normal game state. If it is determined, a left-turn instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, and if it is determined that the player is left-handed during the normal game state, the audio lamp control device A right-hand instruction screen display command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 via the display controller 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, when it is determined that the player is right-handed while the game state is normal, the player is instructed to perform left-handing in an advantageous manner to the player, and the game state is in the midst of a probable change or time reduction. In the middle case, if it is determined that the player has left-handed, the case of instructing the player to right-hand in favor of the player has been described, but only when the game state is normal, the player If it is determined that the player is right-handed, the player is instructed to perform a left-hand in favor of the player. Good. Conversely, if it is determined that the player has left-handed only when the gaming state is in the midst of probable change or during working hours, the player is instructed to perform right-handing in favor of the player, and the gaming state is determined to be normal. In this case, it is not necessary to instruct the player in particular the direction of the hit ball. In particular, since the player wants to obtain more profits when the playing state is changing or during working hours, at least when the playing state is changing or working, the player has left-handed. When it is determined, by instructing the player to make a right-hand operation that is advantageous to the player, the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  In the above embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , "Fluctuation start-up", "Fast variation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", prepare a display data table for each element, according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may make it. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Therefore, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image at which the drawing processing is completed (in each of the above embodiments, every 20 milliseconds) However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image developed first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, The buffer may be alternately selected, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. Frame buffer to be replaced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display data table defines the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at the time corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 second. Since one frame image is displayed every time, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decreased by 1 ( Although the case has been described (see S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the special drawing 1 of the main control device 110 is subtracted in accordance with the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start process (S1308). The value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 16) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. A 1-hold ball count command or a special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or the special figure 2 hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 together with the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command to control the sound ramp. The information may be transmitted to the device 113. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of balls retained in the main control device 110. In this case, S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 are omitted.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to perform display. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of components can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag, The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Also, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, the audio data is read from the audio data storage area 222a, and the reproduced audio data is read. It may be set in the data storage area 223d.

  In each of the above embodiments, the prize in the first ball entrance 64, the prize in the second ball entrance 640, and the passage of the ball through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are the maximum. Although it was configured to be held up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . In addition, the part of the third symbol display device 81 is used to calculate the number of balls to be held in a variable effect based on winning in the first entrance 64 and the number of balls to be held in a variable effect based on winning in the second entrance 640 in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The area divided into four or four areas may be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and the lamp may be displayed separately from the first symbol display device 37. The light emitting member may be provided, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable effect, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the horizontal direction. The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a fluctuating effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information under the control of the sub-control means. Display means, and sound output means for outputting sound based on the display content of the display means, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means In a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player, the gaming machine is configured to provide a predetermined game value to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means. The first game value is given as the game value of the game, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the variable effect performed by the display means, the first game value is given to the player as the predetermined game value. Game value A second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the first display mode, indicating that there is a possibility that the variable display is stopped and displayed in the first display mode. An effect mode, a second effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the second display mode, and a third effect simultaneously indicating the first effect mode and the second effect mode And a first sound output when the fluctuation effect is performed in the first effect mode on the display means, and a sound output by the display means. And a second sound that is output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode. The sub-control means uses the display device to display the variable effect in the third effect mode. Is performed, the sound output means outputs the second Gaming machine A1, characterized in that for outputting audio.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, and the control is performed by the sub-control means based on a control signal from the main control means. Under the control of the sub-control means, a fluctuating effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information is performed by the display means, and sound is output from the sound output means based on the display content on the display means.

  In this gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in the variable effect performed in the display mode, a first game value is given to the player as a predetermined game value. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the variable effect performed in the display mode, the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game value as the predetermined game value for the player Value is given. Further, as the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means, a first effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of being stopped and displayed in the first display mode, and a stop mode in which the stop effect can be displayed in the second display mode The second effect mode includes a second effect mode indicating that there is sex, and a third effect mode indicating both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Further, when the variable effect is performed in the first effect mode on the display means, the first sound is output from the sound output device, and when the variable effect is performed on the display device in the second effect mode. The second sound is output from the sound output means.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, that is, when the variable effect is performed in the effect mode in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are displayed simultaneously, The control means outputs only the second sound from the sound output means and does not output the first sound. Thus, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the player listens to the same second sound as in the case where the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode, and It is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the second game value is provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes a display control means for controlling display on the display means, and a sound control means for controlling sound output from the sound output means, and the display control means comprises: Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content of the means, the notification means, when performing the variable effect in the third effect mode to the display means, as the display content in the display means, The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means outputs based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means. An output control unit for selecting an audio to be output and starting the output; and a notifying unit that displays the second effect mode and the first effect as display contents on the display unit. When the output of the second sound and the first sound as sounds to be output is started by the output control means based on the notification of the first sound, the output of the first sound Gaming machine A2, comprising: stopping means for stopping the game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means of the sub-control means to output sound. Further, the display content on the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the sound to be output is selected by the output control means provided in the sound control means based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are displayed on the display means as voice control by the notifying means of the display control means. Notified to the means. When the output of the second sound and the first sound is output as the sound to be output by the output control means of the sound control means, the output of the first sound is stopped by the stop means. With this, the audio control unit performs control to select and output the audio to be output once based on the display content on the display unit notified from the notification unit of the display control unit. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is stopped. Therefore, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, the second sound is output. Only audio can be output. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, thereby increasing the interest of the player. This has the effect. Also, based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, first, the output of the audio is started, so it is not necessary to determine the presence or absence of the audio output based on the display content notified from the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Further, there is an effect that sound output based on the display content notified from the notification unit can be performed immediately.

  In the gaming machine A2, when performing the variable effect on the display device in the third effect mode, the notification means first sets the second effect mode to the sound control means as display content on the display means. , And then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means. The output control means outputs the sound to be output in the order of the display contents of the display means notified by the notification means. A game machine A3 characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means, and then the first effect is displayed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Also, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents on the display means notified by the notification means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, First, the output of the second sound is started, and then the output of the first sound is started. Thereafter, the output of the first sound is stopped by the stopping means. Accordingly, the output of the second sound to be output when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode can be started before the first sound whose output is stopped. When the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  The gaming machine A4 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, wherein the first sound is a sound that is in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the sound is started.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, since the first sound is a sound in a silent state for a predetermined time after the start of the sound output, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display means, the first sound is temporarily output. In the case of, even when the output of the second sound and the first sound as the sound to be output is started, a sound in a silent state is output from the first sound. Therefore, by stopping the output of the first sound until a predetermined time elapses after the output of the first sound is started, even if the first sound is output for a moment, the player can be notified to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes noise.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes a display control means for controlling display on the display means, and a sound control means for controlling sound output from the sound output means, and the display control means comprises: Notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content of the means, the notification means, when performing the variable effect in the third effect mode to the display means, as the display content in the display means, The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means outputs based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means. An output control unit for selecting an audio to be output and starting the output; and a notifying unit that displays the second effect mode and the first effect as display contents on the display unit. When the output of the second sound and the first sound as sounds to be output is started by the output control means based on the notification of the first sound, the first sound is silenced. A gaming machine B1 comprising: rewriting means for rewriting and outputting a state voice.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means of the sub-control means to output sound. Further, the display content on the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the sound to be output is selected by the output control means provided in the sound control means based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are displayed on the display means as voice control by the notifying means of the display control means. Notified to the means. When the output of the second voice and the first voice is output as the voice to be output by the output control means of the voice control means, the output of the first voice is output by the rewriting means to the voice in a silent state. Is rewritten and output. With this, the audio control unit performs control to select and output the audio to be output once based on the display content on the display unit notified from the notification unit of the display control unit. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is rewritten to a sound in a silent state and output. Therefore, the variable effect is displayed on the display means in the third effect mode. If so, the player can be made to hear as if only the second sound was output. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, thereby increasing the interest of the player. This has the effect. Further, based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, first, the output of the voice is started, so that the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be immediately performed. There is.

  In the gaming machine B1, the notifying means, when performing the variable effect on the display means in the third effect mode, first displays the second effect mode on the sound control means as display content on the display means. , And then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means. The output control means outputs the sound to be output in the order of the display contents of the display means notified by the notification means. A game machine B2 characterized by selecting and starting output.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means, and then the first effect is displayed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Also, since the sound to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents on the display means notified by the notification means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, First, the output of the second sound is started, and then the output of the first sound is started. Thereafter, the first voice is rewritten to a silent voice by the rewriting means and output. Thus, the output of the second sound to be heard by the player when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode is started before the first sound that is rewritten to the sound in the silent state. Therefore, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first sound is a sound that is output in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the sound is started.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, since the first sound is a sound that is originally silenced for a predetermined time after the sound output is started, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display unit, Even when the output of the second audio and the first audio as the audio to be output is started, a silent audio is output from the first audio. Therefore, by the time the predetermined time has elapsed after the output of the first sound is started, the first sound is rewritten to a sound in a silent state, so that the player can hear the first sound as noise. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes a display control means for controlling display on the display means, and a sound control means for controlling sound output from the sound output means, and the display control means comprises: Notifying means for notifying the voice control means of the display content of the means, the notifying means, when performing the variable effect in the third effect mode to the display means, first as the display content in the display means, Notifying the second effect mode to the voice control means, and then notifying the first effect mode to the voice control means, wherein the voice control means is notified by the notification means. Output control means for selecting a sound to be output and starting output based on the display content on the display means; And a non-accepting means for setting the notification of the first effect mode from the notifying means to a non-accepting state for at least a predetermined time after receiving the notification when the second effect mode is notified. A gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means of the sub-control means to output sound. Further, the display content on the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the sound to be output is selected by the output control means provided in the sound control means based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means, and then the first effect is displayed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. On the other hand, in the voice control means, when the notification of the second effect mode is received as the display content on the display means from the notification means, at least the first effect mode of the first effect mode from the notification means is received for a predetermined time after the notification is received. The notification is placed in a non-accepting state by the non-accepting means. Thereby, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display device, only the second sound can be output by the output control device of the sound control device. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, thereby increasing the interest of the player. This has the effect. Further, in this case, since the first sound is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, the output of the second sound to be heard by the player can be started immediately, so that the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. This has the effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means includes a display control means for controlling display on the display means, and a sound control means for controlling sound output from the sound output means, and the display control means comprises: Notifying means for notifying the voice control means of the display content of the means, the notifying means, when performing the variable effect in the third effect mode to the display means, first as the display content in the display means, Notifying the second effect mode to the voice control means, and then notifying the first effect mode to the voice control means, wherein the voice control means is notified by the notification means. Output control means for selecting a sound to be output based on the display content on the display means and starting output, and the first effect mode or the second effect mode from the notification means. When the first sound or the second sound is selected as the sound to be output by the output control means based on the notification of the appearance mode, a second sound for outputting the first sound is output. Storage means for storing the first sound data or the second sound data for outputting the second sound, and the second control means outputs the second sound data based on the second sound data stored in the storage means. When the first sound data is output, the storage means includes a storage control means for not storing the first sound data even if the first effect mode is notified from the notification means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, the display of the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub-control means, and the sound output means is controlled by the sound control means of the sub-control means to output sound. Further, the display content on the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the sound to be output is selected by the output control means provided in the sound control means based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

  Here, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, first, as the display content on the display means, the second effect mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means, and then the first effect is displayed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Then, the output control means of the sound control means first selects the second sound as the sound to be output. Then, the second audio data for outputting the second audio is stored in the storage unit. Note that the storage means outputs the first sound or the second sound as sound to be output by the output control means based on the notification of the first effect mode or the second effect mode from the notification means. When selected, the first audio data for outputting the first audio or the second audio data for outputting the second audio is stored. In the case where the second sound is output by the output control means based on the second sound data stored in the storage means, even if the first effect mode is notified from the notification means, the storage control means Thereby, the first voice data is not stored in the storage unit. Thereby, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode on the display device, only the second sound can be output by the output control device of the sound control device. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, thereby increasing the interest of the player. This has the effect. Further, in this case, since the first sound is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, the output of the second sound to be heard by the player can be started immediately, so that the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. This has the effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

  A gaming board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the gaming board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board. A determination means for performing a determination in response to detection of a ball entering the guidance area by the detection means, and a fluctuation effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information based on a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be performed, and in a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means, A first starting area in which a ball fired to the left of the game board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball fired to the right of the game board is easy to enter, Machine is in the first state as a gaming state At least a second state, and when the gaming state is the first state, a case where a ball enters the first starting area is better than a case where a ball enters the second starting area. Also works favorably for the player, and when the gaming state is the second state, a game is more likely to occur when the ball enters the second starting area than when the ball enters the first starting area. The gaming machine further includes a first passing means through which at least a part of a ball flowing down the left side of the gaming board passes, and the gaming state being in the second state. A first detecting means for detecting that two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls have passed through the first passing means during a predetermined time; and the first detecting means changes the gaming state to the second state. In this case, two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls pass through the first passage means during a predetermined time. If it is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a first informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the game board on the right side E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when it is detected by the detecting means that the ball fired toward the gaming board by the firing means enters a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. Is determined by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a fluctuating effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information is performed by the display means, and when the fluctuating effect is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode, the game A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In this gaming machine, the starting area has a first starting area in which a ball fired to the left of the gaming board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball fired to the right of the gaming board is easy to enter. It is constituted by. The gaming board has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states. If the game state is the first state, the player enters the ball in the first start area more advantageously than the ball enters the second start area, and the game state becomes the first state. In the case of the two states, when the ball enters the second starting area, the player works more advantageously than when the ball enters the first starting area.

  Here, when the game state is the second state, the ball having the predetermined number of two or more balls passes through the first passage means through which at least a part of the ball flowing down the left side of the game board passes. Is detected by the first detection means, the first notification means notifies the player that the ball is to be fired toward the right side of the game board. Accordingly, although the game state is in the second state, it is advantageous for the player to make the ball fired in the second starting area where the ball fired to the right of the game board is easy to enter, even though it is advantageous. If there is a possibility that the game ball is fired toward the left side of the game board, the player can be encouraged to fire the ball toward the right side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  Also, only when a ball having a predetermined number of balls equal to or more than two balls passes through the first passage means for a predetermined time, a notification is sent to the player to launch the ball toward the right side of the game board, Despite the player firing a ball toward the right side of the game board, some balls flowed down the left side of the game board, and the ball passed the first passage means. In addition, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of notification that the player is directed to fire the ball toward the right side of the game board. Also, even if the player fires a ball toward the left side of the game board, the ball is not released until a ball having a predetermined number of two or more balls passes through the first passage means for a predetermined time. By informing the player to fire the game toward the right side of the game board, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such information. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification of the launch direction of the ball is appropriately performed, and the frequent occurrence of the notification can prevent the interest in the game from being hindered.

  A gaming board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the gaming board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball fired by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board. A determination means for performing a determination in response to detection of a ball entering the guidance area by the detection means, and a fluctuation effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information based on a determination result by the determination means. Display means to be performed, and in a gaming machine in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means, A first starting area in which a ball fired to the left of the game board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball fired to the right of the game board is easy to enter, Machine is in the first state as a gaming state At least a second state, and when the gaming state is the first state, a case where a ball enters the first starting area is better than a case where a ball enters the second starting area. Also works favorably for the player, and when the gaming state is the second state, a game is more likely to occur when the ball enters the second starting area than when the ball enters the first starting area. The gaming machine further comprises a second passing means through which at least a part of a ball flowing to the right of the gaming board passes, and wherein the gaming state is in the first state. A second detecting means for detecting that two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls pass through the second passing means during a predetermined time; and the second detecting means changes the gaming state to the first state. In a case where two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls pass through the second passage means during a predetermined time, It if is detected, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a second informing means for informing to fire toward the ball to the left of the game board E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, when it is detected by the detecting means that the ball fired toward the gaming board by the firing means enters a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. Is determined by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a fluctuating effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information is performed by the display means, and when the fluctuating effect is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode, the game A predetermined game value is given to the player.

  In this gaming machine, the starting area has a first starting area in which a ball fired to the left of the gaming board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball fired to the right of the gaming board is easy to enter. It is constituted by. The gaming board has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states. If the game state is the first state, the player enters the ball in the first start area more advantageously than the ball enters the second start area, and the game state becomes the first state. In the case of the two states, when the ball enters the second starting area, the player works more advantageously than when the ball enters the first starting area.

  Here, when the gaming state is in the first state, the ball having at least a predetermined number of two or more balls passes through the second passing means through which at least a part of the balls flowing down the right side of the game board passes. Is detected by the second detection means, the second notification means is informed to fire the ball toward the left side of the game board. Thus, although the game state is in the first state, it is more advantageous for the player to make the ball fired in the first starting area where the ball fired to the left of the game board is easy to enter. If there is a possibility that the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game board, the player can be encouraged to fire the ball toward the left side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

  In addition, only when a ball having a predetermined number of balls equal to or more than two balls passes through the second passage means for a predetermined time, a notification is sent that prompts the player to fire the ball toward the left side of the game board, Despite the player firing a ball toward the left side of the game board, some balls flowed down the right side of the game board, and the ball passed through the second passage means. In addition, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of notification that the player is directed to shoot the ball toward the left side of the game board. Further, even if the player fires a ball toward the right side of the game board, the ball is not released until two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls pass through the second passage means for a predetermined time. By informing the player to fire toward the left of the game board, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such information. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification of the launch direction of the ball is appropriately performed, and the frequent occurrence of the notification can prevent the interest in the game from being hindered.

  The gaming machine F1 wherein any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as fluctuation effects are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (starts winning) a ball at an entrance (starting opening). A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed, symbols and the like displayed based on predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stopped symbols become a predetermined combination at a predetermined stop position. A large jackpot is generated when the user is present (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272159).
In addition, during scrolling of symbols or the like, an entertaining effect (for example, a display by a reach display or the like) indicating in advance that a game state (eg, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player sometimes occurs is performed. Some devices have been devised to give the player a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, in the effect by the reach display, a so-called double reach display is performed, and not only does it simply suggest a big hit, but also by the stop symbol when the scroll stops, the probability of the big hit after the big hit becomes a high probability? There are also gaming machines that produce effects that expect no or no.
In some conventional gaming machines, when a reach display is performed, different reach voices are prepared depending on the symbols that have achieved the reach display. In this type of gaming machine, when a reach is generated in a plurality of symbols by a double reach display or the like, a reach voice corresponding to each symbol is output, but the reach voice is not necessarily considered in consideration of the interest of the player. It was not output.
The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing audio output in consideration of the interest of a player.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 64 1st entrance (1st starting area)
67 1st through gate (1st passage means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
112a Ball launching unit (ball launching device)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means, voice control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means, display control means)
223d5 Reach voice area (storage means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
640 Second entrance (second starting area)
670 Second through gate (second passage means)
S1201, S1206 (Detection means)
S1308 Change start processing (determination means)
S1916 Sound reproduction setting processing (output control means)
S2204 to S2207, S2210 (second detecting means)
S2208 (second notification means)
S2212 to S2215, S2218 (First detecting means)
S2216 (first notification means)
S2305 (stopping means)
S2321 (Rewriting means)
S2334 (Non-reception means)
S2342: No (storage control means)
S2603 (Notification means)

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a fluctuating effect accompanied by dynamic display of identification information under the control of the sub-control means. Display means, and a sound output means for outputting a sound, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in a variable effect performed by the display means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In the granted gaming machine,
As the effect form of the variable effect performed by the display means,
A first production mode,
A second production mode,
A third production mode that simultaneously shows the first production mode and the second production mode,
As audio output by the audio output means,
A first sound output when the variable effect is performed in the first effect mode on the display unit;
A second sound output when the variable effect is performed in the second effect mode on the display means.
The sub-control means,
Display control means for controlling display on the display means,
Voice control means for controlling the output of voice in the voice output means,
The display control unit includes a notification unit that notifies the audio control unit of the content displayed on the display unit,
The notifying means, when performing the variable effect on the display means in the third effect mode, first notifies the voice control means of the second effect mode as display content on the display means, Notifying the voice control means of the first effect mode,
The voice control means,
Output control means for selecting a sound to be output and starting output based on the display content on the display means notified by the notification means,
When the second effect mode is notified from the notifying unit as the display content on the display unit, all the notifications from the notifying unit are set to the non-accepting state for a predetermined period after the notification is received. A gaming machine, comprising: a receiving unit.

Images